Saturn 2004 L-Series Specifications

Saturn 2004 L-Series Specifications
2004 Saturn L-Series Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-3
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-8
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-11
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-35
Air Bag Systems
...................................... 1-62
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-72
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-9
Windows ................................................. 2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-19
Mirrors .................................................... 2-33
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-40
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-41
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-45
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-2
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-17
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-25
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-41
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-32
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-46
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-53
Tires
...................................................... 5-54
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-82
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-90
Electrical System ...................................... 5-91
Capacities and Specifications
..................... 5-98
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects
............................ 7-9
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
How to Use This Manual
SATURN and the SATURN Emblem are registered
trademarks of Saturn Corporation. GM and the
GM Emblem are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 04LSERIES B FIRST EDITION
ii
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what
is in the manual, and the page number where you will
find it.
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 11/04/03
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.
{CAUTION:
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage your
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the
damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
There are also warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-3
Manual Seats ................................................1-3
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ..............................1-3
Six-Way Power Driver Seat ..............................1-4
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-4
Heated Seats .................................................1-5
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-5
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Rear Seats .......................................................1-8
Split Folding Rear Seat ...................................1-8
Safety Belts ...................................................1-11
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-11
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-15
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-16
Driver Position ..............................................1-16
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-24
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-25
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-25
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults .......................................1-33
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-35
Child Restraints .............................................1-35
Older Children ..............................................1-35
Infants and Young Children ............................1-38
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-42
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-44
Top Strap ....................................................1-46
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-47
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-50
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System .........................................1-52
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position (Sedan) ........................................1-52
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Seat Position (Wagon) ...............................1-54
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
Seat Position (Wagon) ...............................1-56
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ............................................1-58
Air Bag Systems ............................................1-62
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-64
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-67
1-1
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-68
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-68
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? .......1-69
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-71
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-72
1-2
Restraint System Check ..................................1-72
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-72
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ...................................................1-73
Front Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.
If your vehicle has this feature, the driver’s seat height
adjuster is located on the outside of the seat.
Pull lever up to raise or lower seat to a comfortable
height.
1-3
Six-Way Power Driver Seat
Manual Lumbar
If your vehicle has this
feature, the knob is
located on the inboard
side of the driver’s
seatback.
If your vehicle has this feature, the control is located on
the outboard side of the driver’s seat. To adjust the
seat do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by pressing the
center switch forward or rearward.
• Move the entire seat up or down by pressing the
DOWN/UP switch.
• Adjust the seatback by pressing the RECLINE
switch forward or rearward.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-5, later in this
section, for more information.
1-4
Turn the knob forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support.
Heated Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
If your vehicle has this
feature, the thumbwheel
controls for both driver and
passenger heated seats
are located in the center of
the instrument panel.
Move the thumbwheel to the first circle to warm the seat
to a lower temperature and to the second circle for a
higher temperature. An indicator light tells you that the
heating system is on. This feature will only work
when the ignition is on.
To adjust the seatback on a manual seat, lift the lever
on the outer side of the seat and move the seatback
to where you want it. Then release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
1-5
On a power driver’s seat,
adjust the seatback by
pressing the RECLINE
switch forward or rearward.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-6
Head Restraints
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can not do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can not do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can not do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Your vehicle has adjustable head restraints on the front
seats. Slide an adjustable head restraint up or down
so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top
of your head. This position reduces the chance of neck
injury in a crash.
The adjustable head restraints tilt forward and
rearward also.
1-7
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
Your vehicle is equipped with a split folding rear seat. A
split folding rear seat enables you to carry long cargo
by folding down part or all of the rear seat.
Sedan
On sedans, you can fold
either the driver’s or
passenger’s right side of
the seatback separately or
both sides together. Lift
the lever on the corner of
the seatback.
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, remove the
rear center lap-shoulder belt latch. Push the release
button up into the slot with a key to remove the
lap-shoulder belt latch.
Make sure the front seat is not reclined. If it is, the rear
seatback won’t fold down all the way.
1-8
To raise the seatback up, follow these steps:
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1. Raise the seatback up and make sure it latches.
Push and pull the top of the seatback to ensure
that all of the latches are secure.
2. Reconnect the center safety belt latch plate to the
buckle.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Make sure the safety belt label is pointing to the release
button, and that both the safety belt label and release
button are facing the front of the vehicle. Make sure the
belt is not twisted. Push and pull on the latch plate to
ensure the belt is secure.
1-9
Wagon
On wagons, you can fold either the passenger’s side of
the seatback or the entire seatback.
To fold down the
passenger’s side of the
seatback, pull the lever on
the corner of the
seatback. To lower the
entire rear seatback, pull
the lever on the corner
of the driver’s side
seatback.
1-10
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
When the seatback is put in an upright position, be sure
the latches engage by pushing rearward with your hand
over the latch locations. Then push and pull at the top of
the seatback to ensure that all latches are secure.
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-28.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
1-11
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on
wheels.
1-12
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
1-13
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-14
or the instrument panel...
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be – whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts – not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has
air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-15
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident – even one that isn’t your fault – you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-35
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-38. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
1-16
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to. If the belt is not
long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on
page 1-35
1-17
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-18
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
To move it down, press down on the indented part of
the height adjuster and move the height adjuster to the
desired position. You can move the adjuster up just
by pushing up on the bottom of the height adjuster. After
you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to
move it down without pressing down on the indented
part to make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
1-19
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-20
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-21
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-22
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-23
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-24
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Rear Seat Passengers
Right Front Passenger Position
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-16.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt – except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way
and start again.
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Passenger Positions (Sedan)
1-25
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here
is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-26
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.
{CAUTION:
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
1-27
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
(Wagon)
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-28
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-29
And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.
{CAUTION:
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
1-30
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
Center Rear Passenger Position
(Wagon)
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-31
Lap Belt
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
When you sit in the center seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the
belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
1-32
Buckle, position and release is the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. Make sure the release
button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able
to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
If you would like to have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides installed on your vehicle, contact your retailer.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each outside passenger
position in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt
comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints
and booster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort
guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here is
how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-33
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-34
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-25.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop
of elastic cord exposed.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough to fasten, your
retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Do not let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts. If you have the choice,
a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear
a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-35
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-36
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: For Sedan Models: If the child is sitting in a seat
next to a window, move the child toward the center
of the vehicle. If the child is sitting in the center
rear seat passenger position, move the child toward
the safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint that belts provide.
For Wagon Models: Move the child toward the
center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder
belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a
crash the child’s upper body would have the
restraint that belts provide. If the child is sitting in a
rear seat outside position, see Rear Safety Belt
Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults on
page 1-33. If the child is so small that the shoulder
belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck,
you might want to place the child in the center seat
position, the one that has only a lap belt.
1-37
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
1-38
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much -- until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-39
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be
used.
1-40
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-41
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-42
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.
1-43
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-44
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured in
a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat
and an older child riding in a booster seat. Never put a
rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the right
front passenger’s air bag if it inflates. Never
secure a child restraint in the center front seat.
It is always better to secure a child restraint in
the rear seat.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle – even when no child
is in it.
1-45
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in Top
Strap Anchor Location on page 1-47. Be sure to use
an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
1-46
Top Strap Anchor Location
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Your vehicle has top strap anchors installed for the rear
seating positions only.
Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in the
right front passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that
the top strap must be anchored. There is no place
to anchor the top strap in this position.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
1-47
Sedan
Wagon
The anchors are located behind the rear seat on the
filler panel. In order to get to one of these brackets, you
will have to open the trim cover. The trim cover is
marked with the symbol for child seat top tether anchor.
Anchor brackets are located on the floor in the
cargo area.
1-48
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Routing the top strap for a child restraint over
or under the cargo shade could cause the
shade to come loose and even break. If this
happens, the shade could be thrown about the
vehicle in a collision or sudden maneuver. You
or others could be injured. When anchoring a
top strap to an anchor bracket, be sure to
remove the cargo shade from your vehicle. See
“Cargo Shade” in the Index.
Each top tether is designed to anchor only one
child restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single bracket could cause the
anchor to come loose or even break during a
crash. A child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people and
damage to your vehicle, attach only one child
restraint per bracket.
1-49
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You’ll find
anchors (A) for all three rear seating positions.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A, B) and child
restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a
top tether strap (C).
1-50
To assist you in locating the
lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each
seating position with the
LATCH system has a label
on the seatback at each
lower anchor position.
The labels are located near the base of all three rear
seating positions.
{CAUTION:
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
1-51
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position (Sedan)
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-50.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-46.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
1-52
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-50. See Top Strap
on page 1-46 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.
1-53
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position (Wagon)
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-50. See Top Strap
on page 1-46 if the child restraint has one.
5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt
while you push down on the child restraint. If
you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you
may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-54
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.
1-55
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Rear Seat Position (Wagon)
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-50. See Top Strap
on page 1-46 if the child restraint has one.
5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt
while you push down on the child restraint. If
you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you
may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-56
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1-57
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
1-58
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-50. See Top Strap
on page 1-46 if the child restraint has one.
There is no top strap anchor in the right front passenger’s
position. Do not secure a child seat in this position if a
national or local law requires that the top strap be
anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child
restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, you will be using the
lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See Manual Seats on page 1-3.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-59
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-60
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. You may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-61
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag
systems.
Your vehicle has four air bags:
• A frontal air bag for the driver and another frontal
air bag for the right front passenger,
• A roof-mounted side impact air bag for the driver
and passenger directly behind the driver, and
• A roof-mounted side impact air bag for the right
front passenger and the person seated directly
behind that passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these
air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt – even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts but do not replace them.
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal air bags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
air bags have provided in the past.
The side impact air bags are designed to inflate
only in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle.
CAUTION:
1-62
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
They are not designed to inflate in frontal, in
rollover or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly – whether or not there is an air
bag for that person.
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for air bag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal air bags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Older
Children” or “Infants and Young Children.”
1-63
There is a air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the air bag symbol.
Where Are the Air Bags?
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-28
for more information.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-64
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has a side impact air bag for the driver
and the person seated directly behind the driver, it is in
the ceiling above the side windows.
1-65
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has a side impact air bag for the right
front passenger and the person seated directly behind
that passenger, it is in the ceiling above the side
windows.
1-66
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering. And, because your vehicle has
side impact air bags, never secure anything to
the roof of your vehicle by routing the rope or
tiedown through any door or window opening.
If you do, the path of an inflating side impact
air bag will be blocked. The path of an inflating
air bag must be kept clear.
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
does not move or deform, the threshold level is about 9 to
15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The threshold level can vary,
however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be
somewhat above or below this range. If your vehicle
strikes something that will move or deform, such as a
parked car, the threshold level will be higher.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear impacts,
or in many side impacts because inflation would not help
the occupant.
Side impact air bags are designed to inflate in moderate
to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag will
inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
air bags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
1-67
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For
both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag, and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front
of the right front passenger. For vehicles with side
impact air bags, the air bag modules are located in the
ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal air bags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags, and only in moderate to severe
side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag.
1-68
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module will be
hot for a short time. These components include the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal air bag and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal
air bag. For vehicles with side impact air bags, the
ceiling of your vehicle near the side windows will be hot.
The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated air bags. Air bag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can not get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior dome lamp on and
flash the daytime running lights on and off when the air
bags inflate (if battery power is available). You can
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by
using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
1-69
You must first turn your ignition key to the following
ignition switch positions:
1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
2. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position.
3. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information
about the air bag system. The module records
information about the readiness of the system, when
the system commands air bag inflation and
driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, or the side
impact air bag covering on the ceiling near the side
windows, the bag may not work properly. You
may have to replace the air bag module in the
steering wheel, both the air bag module and
the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
air bag, or side impact air bag module and ceiling
covering for the roof-mounted side impact air
bag. Do not open or break the air bag coverings.
air bag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your air bag system. If you do not get them, the air
bag system will not be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include air bag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
1-70
system. Improper service can mean that your air
bag system will not work properly. See your retailer
for service.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are air bag system parts in several places around
your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate
while someone is working on your vehicle. Your retailer
and the Saturn Service Manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag systems.
To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-10.
{CAUTION:
For up to one minute after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close to
an air bag when it inflates. Avoid wires
wrapped with yellow tape, yellow coverings, or
yellow connectors. They are probably part of
the air bag systems. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-71
Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Q: If I add a luggage carrier or sunroof to the roof
of my vehicle, will it keep the roof-mounted side
impact air bags from working properly?
A: As long as the luggage carrier or sunroof is
properly installed so that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
roof-mounted side impact air bags from working
properly in a crash.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-72
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need new
parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
If your seat adjuster won’t work after a crash, the
special part of the safety belt that goes through the seat
to the adjuster may need to be replaced.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part about the air bag system
earlier in this manual.
1-73
✍ NOTES
1-74
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-9
Door Locks ....................................................2-9
Power Door Locks ........................................2-10
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-11
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-11
Lockout Protection ........................................2-12
Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................2-12
Trunk/Liftgate ...............................................2-13
Windows ........................................................2-16
Manual Windows ..........................................2-17
Power Windows ............................................2-17
Sun Visors ...................................................2-18
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-18
Passlock® ....................................................2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-19
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-19
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-20
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-21
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-22
Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-23
Parking Brake ..............................................2-27
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle) ......2-28
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-30
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-30
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-31
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-32
Mirrors ...........................................................2-33
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-33
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-33
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
Display ....................................................2-34
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-36
Outside Remote Control Mirror .......................2-38
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-39
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-39
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-39
OnStar® System .............................................2-40
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
Storage Areas ................................................2-41
Glove Box ...................................................2-41
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-41
Assist Handles .............................................2-41
2-2
Load Floor Storage Box .................................2-42
Roof Rack System ........................................2-42
Cargo Cover ................................................2-43
Sunroof .........................................................2-45
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-3
One key is used for the ignition and all of the locks.
Key code information can be obtained only at the retailer
where your vehicle was purchased. These code
numbers can be used to make new keys. Additional
keys that are needed can be made at any retail service
facility provided you have the key code information.
Store this information in a safe place, but not in
your vehicle.
Have extra keys made. Your service parts department
can make extra keys for you.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
Remote Keyless Entry System
The remote keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See “Battery
Replacement” and “Resynchronization” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-5.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
With this feature, you can lock and unlock the doors or
the trunk from about 26 feet (8 m) away using the
remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your
vehicle.
LOCK: Press this button
on the remote keyless
entry transmitter to lock the
doors. This also arms
the theft-deterrent system.
See “Theft-Deterrent
System” following for
information on arming the
theft-deterrent system.
• If you are still having trouble, see your Saturn
retailer or authorized service provider for service.
Your vehicle can be programmed so that the parking
lamps will flash and/or the horn will sound when you lock
the doors with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
See your retailer for more information on programming
this feature.
2-5
UNLOCK: Press this button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter to unlock the driver’s door. This also
disarms the theft-deterrent system. See “Theft-Deterrent
System” following for information on disarming the
theft-deterrent system. Press the button again within
5 seconds to unlock the rest of the doors.
Passive Arming: The system will arm itself one minute
after the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door
has been opened and closed. If the lock button on the
transmitter is pressed before the minute has passed, the
system will arm immediately. The system will disarm
when the unlock button is pressed.
L(Panic Alarm): Press the button with the horn
symbol when the ignition is turned off. The horn
will sound and the parking lamps and dome lamp will
flash for up to two minutes. To stop the panic alarm,
press this button again.
Security System Disable: The system will not arm.
V (Trunk):
Press this button to open the trunk or
liftgate. The trunk or liftgate will not open when this
button is pressed if the vehicle is moving.
Theft-Deterrent System
The remote keyless entry transmitter is used to
arm/disarm the theft-deterrent system. Your vehicle’s
theft-deterrent system can be programmed to three
different modes.
Active Arming: The system will arm when the lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed. The system will disarm when the unlock button
is pressed.
2-6
To change the mode that your vehicle is programmed to,
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACC.
2. Press the panic alarm button on the transmitter
slowly four times within five seconds.
3. You must complete one of the following within three
seconds to change the mode.
• To select the active arming mode, press the lock
button on the transmitter.
• To select the passive arming mode, press the
trunk release button on the transmitter.
• To select the security system disable mode,
press the unlock button on the transmitter.
A chime will sound once the mode has been selected.
Battery Replacement
If you accidentally set off the alarm when entering/exiting
the vehicle, you can shut it off by pressing any button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter other than
the panic alarm button.
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
If you hear three horn chirps when you press the unlock
button on the transmitter, that means the vehicle’s
alarm was triggered while you were away.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your retailer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your retailer. When the retailer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your retailer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1. Use a flat thin object to pry open the transmitter.
2-7
Resynchronization
This is used to keep the transmitter of the vehicle
communicating with the receiver of the vehicle.
Resynchronization may be required due to the security
method used by this system.
Your vehicle has an automatic resynchronization
function built into the system. If your transmitter is not
working properly and you have to manually
resynchronize, press the lock and unlock buttons at the
same time for seven seconds while you are near
your vehicle. The doors will lock or unlock, depending
on their starting position. If they do not, contact
your retailer for service.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil or
similar object to remove the old battery. Do not use
a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery as the instructions under the
cover indicate.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
If the transmitter does not work, try synchronizing your
transmitter with your receiver. See “Resynchronization”
for more information.
2-8
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, you can use your door key to lock
or unlock a front door.
To manually lock or unlock
the door from the inside,
move the door lock
pin on the door down or
up. The unlocked door
indicator on the door pin
will be hidden when
the door is locked.
2-9
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
Press the bottom half of
the switch on either front
door to lock all of the
doors. Push the top half of
the switch to unlock all
of the doors. The unlocked
door indicators on the
manual door lock pins will
be hidden when the
doors are locked.
A chime will sound three times to indicate a door is
open when you try to lock the doors with the remote
keyless entry transmitter or the power door lock switch.
The doors will not lock, and the remote keyless entry
system will not arm until all the doors are closed and five
seconds have passed.
The delayed locking feature can be overridden by
pressing the lock button on the remote keyless entry, or
the door lock switch, a second time. The doors will lock
immediately and when all doors are closed the remote
keyless entry system will arm after 30 seconds.
To get the horn to chirp if a door was open during the
arming process, you must press the lock button on your
transmitter twice after the doors are closed.
2-10
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
With this feature, all the doors will lock as the transaxle
is shifted out of PARK (P) if the ignition key is in the
RUN position and all doors are closed. The doors
will automatically lock if the vehicle is going faster than
3 mph (5 km/h).
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks that prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
The rear door security locks
are located on the inside
edge of each rear door.
You must open the rear
doors to access them.
In the following two situations, when a door is opened,
all doors will lock again:
• The brake pedal is applied, a door is opened and
then closed, and the brake pedal is released.
• A door is opened and closed without the brake
pedal applied while the vehicle is moving faster than
3 mph (5 km/h).
When programmed, all doors will unlock when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The programmable unlocking feature can be
programmed on or off by turning the ignition key to RUN
and pressing the unlock power door lock switch for
eight seconds. The horn will chirp once when this
feature is on and will chirp twice when it is off.
To set the secondary locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the lock next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it clockwise for the
driver’s side and counterclockwise for the
passenger’s side.
2. Close the door.
2-11
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the front door power lock switch, or
by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it counterclockwise for the
driver’s side and clockwise for the passenger’s side.
2-12
Lockout Protection
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is in
the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will lock
and only the driver’s door will unlock. Be sure to remove
the key from the ignition when locking your vehicle.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, open your door and set
the locks from the inside. Then get out and close
the door.
Trunk/Liftgate
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk or
liftgate open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You can not
see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.If you must
drive with the trunk or liftgate open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body
and the trunk or liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System on page 3-17.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
Trunk (Sedan)
To open the trunk on your
sedan from outside of your
vehicle you may either
insert the key into the lock
cylinder and turn the
key clockwise, or press the
trunk release button.
To open the trunk on your sedan from inside your
vehicle, push the trunk release button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
Your trunk release button will not function if the vehicle
is moving.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-31.
2-13
Liftgate Release (Wagon)
Unlock the liftgate by doing any of the following:
{CAUTION:
• Press the unlock button on your remote keyless
entry transmitter twice.
•
•
•
•
Press the liftgate button on your transmitter.
Press the interior door unlock switch.
Enable the automatic door unlocking feature.
Insert the key into the liftgate and turn it clockwise
to open the liftgate.
Once the liftgate is unlocked, it can be opened by
pressing the liftgate key cylinder button.
The liftgate will lock automatically when closed and the
vehicle detects a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km).
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk or
liftgate open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You can not
see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death. If you must
drive with the trunk or liftgate open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body
and the trunk or liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System on page 3-17.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-31.
2-14
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
(Sedan)
Pull the t-shaped trunk release handle straight back to
open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handle located
inside the trunk near the bottom edge of the trunk lid.
This handle will glow following exposure to light.
Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk may damage it. Use the
emergency trunk release handle only to help you
open the trunk lid.
Trap-Resistant Trunk Kit
To help prevent a child from becoming trapped in your
trunk, you can order a trap-resistant trunk kit from
your retailer. This kit includes:
• A modified trunk latch.
• A lighted release handle.
See your retailer for additional information.
2-15
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-16
Manual Windows
On a vehicle with manual windows, use the window
crank to open and close each window.
Power Windows
Switches are located on each side of the shift lever on
the console. To open a window press the switch
down and lift up to close it.
The power windows can operate only when the ignition
key is in the RUN or the ACC position.
A rear window switch is located on each rear door.
Press the bottom half of the switch to open the window
and the top to close it.
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature that is labeled AUTO. Press the switch all the
way down and hold it there momentarily, and the driver’s
window will go all the way down. To stop the automatic
function, lift the switch all the way up and release it.
2-17
Window Lock Out
Theft-Deterrent Systems
The driver’s window controls also include a lock-out
switch. Press the window lock switch to the left to stop
rear passengers from using their window switches.
The driver can still control all the windows with the lock
on. Press the right side of the window lock button to
return to normal window operation.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Sun Visors
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Passlock® theft-deterrent system.
To block out glare swing the visors down or to the side.
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Your vehicle has covered visor vanity mirrors. Some
models have illuminated visor vanity mirrors for
the driver only or for the driver and right front passenger.
When you lift the cover the light will automatically
come on, even when the ignition is off.
2-18
Passlock®
L:
This light will come on for the theft-deterent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is
turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the
ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
During normal operation, the security light will go off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned to the
RUN ignition position following an engine start.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from START
as soon as the engine starts.
New Vehicle Break-In
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock® system is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at
this time. You may also want to check the fuses,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-92. See your
retailer for service. Also, see Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-6 for more information.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-40 for more information.
2-19
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn the
switch to four positions.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
can not turn it, be sure you are using the correct
key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. Turn the key only with your hand. Using a
tool to force it could break the key or the ignition
switch. If none of these works, then your vehicle
needs service.
ACC (Accessory): This is the position in which you
can operate your electrical accessories. With the key in
this position, the ignition and automatic transaxle will
unlock. Use this position if your vehicle must be pushed
or towed.
OFF: This position locks your steering column in a
vehicle with a manual transmission. It is a theft-deterrent
feature. You will only be able to remove your key
when the ignition is turned to OFF.
2-20
RUN: This is the position for driving to which the switch
returns after you start the engine and release the
switch. The switch stays in RUN when the engine is
running. But even when the engine is not running, you
can use RUN to operate your electrical accessories
and to display some instrument panel cluster messages
and warning lights.
START: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to RUN for normal driving.
Starting Your Engine
Automatic Transaxle
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position — that is a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
Starting Your Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start, wait about 15 seconds and try
again to start the engine by turning the ignition key to
START. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When your engine has run about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Don’t
race your engine when it’s cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
3. If your engine still will not start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key
in START for about three seconds. If the vehicle
starts briefly but then stops again, do the same
thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from
the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
2-21
Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has this feature, in very cold weather,
−20°F (−29°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can
help. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy
during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater
should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to
starting your vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C),
use of the coolant heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
electrical cord is located in front of the engine
coolant surge tank on the passenger’s side.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your retailer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The retailer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
2-22
Automatic Transaxle Operation
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transaxle,
the shift lever is located on the console between
the seats.
There are several positions for the shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle) on page 2-28. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-40.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle
shift lock control system. You have to fully apply
your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift
out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever – push
the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) and also
release the shift lever button on floor shift console
models as you maintain brake application.
2-23
Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. Press
the shift lever button before moving the shift lever.
See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-30.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-30.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
2-24
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine racing may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not racing when shifting
your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X): This position is for
normal driving with the automatic transaxle. If you need
more power for passing, and you’re:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator all the way down.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go
faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle
system sensor. If you drive very far that way, your
vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens, have
your vehicle serviced right away. Until then, you can
use SECOND (2) when you are driving less than
35 mph (55 km/h) and THIRD (3) for higher speeds.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X). Here are
some times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X):
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power, but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on.
Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)
may damage the transaxle. Also, shifting into
SECOND (2) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) can
cause damage. Drive in THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle will not shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When going down a steep hill.
2-25
Shift Lock Release
3. Lift up and forward to
disengage.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down, but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the ignition to OFF and remove the key.
4. While maintaining brake application, pull up and
hold the white lever and then move the shift lever
into the desired gear position.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible.
2. Carefully pry the shift lock override cover from the
floor shift console.
2-26
Parking Brake
The parking brake lever is located between the
bucket seats.
When parking your vehicle, set the parking brake before
shifting your automatic transaxle into PARK (P).
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-40 for more information.
2-27
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-40.
• Push the lever all the way toward the front of
your vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position
like this:
• Hold in the button on the shift lever.
2-28
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle) on page 2-28.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold
the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can
move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first
pushing the button. If you can, it means that the
shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
2-29
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transaxle
Operation on page 2-23.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P), while pressing the button on the shift
lever and maintaining brake application. Then move the
shift lever into the gear you wish.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift
out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have your vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-30
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can not see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
CAUTION:
•
•
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Repairs were not done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
(Continued)
2-31
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-31.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-26.
2-32
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)
on page 2-28.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-40.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
While you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up
or down and side to side. The day/night adjustment,
located at the bottom of the mirror, allows you to adjust
the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps behind you.
Pull the tab forward for daytime use; push it back
for night use.
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
If your vehicle has this feature, this mirror has a lever
located at the bottom of the mirror. It is used to change
the mirror from day to night position. To reduce glare
from headlamps behind you while driving at night,
pull the lever toward you. To return the mirror to the day
position, return the lever to its original position.
There are also three OnStar® buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror face. See your retailer for
more information on the system and how to subscribe to
OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-40 for more
information about the services OnStar® provides.
2-33
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, an
automatic dimming mirror automatically dims to the
proper level to minimize glare from lights behind
you after dark.
Temperature and Compass Display
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to
turn the comp/temp display on or off.
If the display reads CAL, you will need to calibrate the
compass. For more information on calibration, see
“Compass Calibration” later in this section.
To set the readings to appear in either Fahrenheit or
Celsius do the following:
1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately
four seconds until either a flashing °F, or °C appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
four seconds the unit of measurement will be
set and the compass/temperature display will return.
The mirror also includes a duel display in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and
the outside temperature will both appear in the display
at the same time.
P (On/Off):
2-34
This is the on/off button.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Compass Variance
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned
on automatically each time the ignition is started. To
operate the automatic dimming mirror do the following:
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, your
compass could give false readings.
1. Make sure the indicator light, located to the left
of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, press and
hold the on/off button for approximately six seconds
until the light comes on, indicating that the mirror
is in automatic dimming mode.
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function by
pressing and holding the on/off button for
approximately six seconds until the indicator light
turns off.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside of
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during a
long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust for compass variance.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration from time to time.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the mirror
compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push in
the on/off button for about nine seconds or until CAL is
displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at five mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
2-35
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release the
button. After approximately four seconds of
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked in
and the comp/temp display will return.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic dimming
mirror it will automatically dim to the proper level to
minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display. The compass is now
in zone mode.
2-36
The mirror also includes a display in the upper right
corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and the
outside temperature will both appear in the display at
the same time.
Temperature Display
Compass Calibration
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
TEMP button. Pressing the TEMP button once briefly,
will toggle the temperature reading from Fahrenheit (°F),
Celsius (°C), to off.
The compass may need calibration from time to time.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Press the COMP button to turn the automatic dimming
feature on and off. An indicator light on the bottom
of the mirror face will be on when the automatic dimming
feature is on.
Compass Operation
Press the COMP button once briefly to turn the compass
on or off.
When compass feature is on, the compass will show the
direction the vehicle is traveling, with a maximum of
two characters.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the mirror
compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push in
the COMP button for approximately six seconds or until
CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at five mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, your
compass could give false readings.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during
a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust for compass variance.
2-37
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
Cleaning the Mirror
Use a paper towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
Outside Remote Control Mirror
To adjust the driver’s side outside mirror, move the
knob located on the driver’s door. To adjust the
passenger’s side outside mirror, move the knob located
on the passenger’s door. Adjust each mirror so you
can see the side of your vehicle and the area beside and
behind your vehicle.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for five seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button, the display
will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
2-38
Outside Power Mirrors
The outside power mirror
control is located on the
driver’s door.
Outside Convex Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Use the selector switch located above the round touch
pad to choose either the left or right outside mirror.
To adjust the mirror press the round touch pad in the
desired direction.
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your
vehicle and the area beside and behind your vehicle,
while you are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
Outside Heated Mirrors
When you operate the rear window defogger, it also
warms both outside rearview mirrors to help clear them
of fog or ice. See Climate Control System on page 3-17
or Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-20.
2-39
OnStar® System
OnStar® Services
One of the following plans is normally included for a
specific duration with each vehicle equipped with
OnStar®. You can upgrade or extend your OnStar®
service plan to meet your needs.
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information and convenience services.
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in your vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com,
contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827),
or press the blue OnStar® button to speak to an
OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required
prior to delivery of OnStar® services and prepaid
calling minutes are also required for OnStar® Personal
Calling and OnStar® Virtual Advisor use. Terms and
conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be
found at www.onstar.com.
2-40
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan services
• Route Support
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
Luxury and Leisure Plan
• All Directions and Connections Plan services
• Personal Concierge
®
OnStar Personal Calling
®
With OnStar Personal Calling, you have a safer way to
stay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wireless
phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can place
calls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with no
contracts and no additional roaming charges. To find out
more about OnStar® Personal Calling, refer to the
OnStar® user’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box, or call
OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
With OnStar® Virtual Advisor you can listen to the news,
entertainment and informative topics, such as traffic
and weather reports. You are able to listen and reply to
your e-mail through your vehicle’s speakers.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Use the key to lock and unlock the glove box. To open,
lift the latch.
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle may be equipped with a center console. To
open the console’s storage area, pull up on the latch
located in the front of the console lid.
Assist Handles
A handle above the front passenger’s door and both
rear doors can be used when getting in and out of your
vehicle. The assist handle provides assistance, but
should not be used to support all or even a substantial
portion of a person’s weight.
2-41
Load Floor Storage Box
Some wagon models have a load floor storage box,
which is located in the rear of the vehicle. This storage
space is designed to hold small items.
Roof Rack System
Your vehicle may have the roof rack system to load
things on.
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress and
so forth — the wind can catch it as you drive
along. This can cause you to lose control.
CAUTION:
2-42
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
What you are carrying could be violently torn
off, and this could cause you or other drivers
to have a collision, and of course damage your
vehicle. You may be able to carry something
like this inside. But, never carry something
longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top
of your vehicle.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 100 lbs. (45 kg) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as
far forward as possible and against the side
rails, making sure to fasten it securely.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-34.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check frequently to ensure your cargo is securely
fastened.
Cargo Cover
Wagon models are equipped with a rear compartment
cargo shade. The cargo shade will help to hide
valuables placed in the rear compartment of your
vehicle.
Here’s how to use the cargo shade:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Grasp the handle on the shade and pull it
toward you.
3. Hook the slides of the shade into the notches on
either side of the liftgate opening.
If your cargo shade becomes soiled, it may be cleaned
using the same method as outlined in the vinyl
cleaning section in this handbook. See Cleaning the
Inside of Your Vehicle on page 5-82 for more
information.
2-43
Removing the Cargo Cover
To remove the cargo shade:
{CAUTION:
1. Unhook the shade and allow it to retract all the way.
An improperly stored cargo shade could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the shade, always store
it outside of the vehicle. When you put it back,
always be sure that it is securely installed.
Installing the Cargo Shade
To install the cargo shade:
1. Insert one end of the shade into the slot on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
2. Grasp the shade on the driver’s side of the vehicle
and move it toward the passenger’s side,
compressing the spring.
3. Lift up the end of the shade on the driver’s side of
the vehicle and remove the cargo shade from the
vehicle.
2-44
2. Move the shade toward the passenger’s side to
compress the spring, and lower the shade into
the slot on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
After you’ve installed the cargo shade, check to make
sure it’s secure by trying to lift the shade up without
moving it toward the driver’s or passenger’s side. If you
can lift the cargo shade up, it isn’t secure.
Sunroof
If your vehicle has this
feature, the switch will be
located above your
rearview mirror. Your
ignition key must be in the
RUN or ACC position to
operate the sunroof.
To open the sunroof three-quarters of the way, press
and hold the SLIDE portion of the switch. To open
the sunroof all the way, press and hold the SLIDE
portion of the switch again. To close the sunroof, press
and hold the TILT portion of the switch.
To place the sunroof in the vent position when the
sunroof is closed, press and hold the TILT portion of the
switch. The rear of the sunroof will be raised to
provide ventilation. To close the sunroof from the vent
position, press and hold the SLIDE portion of the switch.
2-45
✍ NOTES
2-46
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-2
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-4
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-5
Horn .............................................................3-5
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-6
Windshield Wiper Lever ...................................3-8
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-15
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-16
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-17
Climate Controls ............................................3-17
Climate Control System .................................3-17
Automatic Climate Control System ...................3-20
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-24
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-24
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-25
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-26
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-27
Tachometer .................................................3-27
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-28
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-28
Battery Warning Light ....................................3-29
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-30
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-31
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ......3-32
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-32
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-33
Low Coolant Warning Light ............................3-33
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-34
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-37
Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-38
Security Light ...............................................3-38
Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-38
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ...........3-39
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light .....................3-39
Trunk Ajar Light ............................................3-39
Service Vehicle Soon Light ............................3-39
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-40
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-40
Audio System(s) .............................................3-41
Setting the Time ...........................................3-41
AM-FM Radio ...............................................3-42
Radio with CD ..............................................3-45
Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-50
Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................3-59
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-69
Radio Reception ...........................................3-71
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .................3-72
Care of Your CDs and DVDs .........................3-73
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ...................3-73
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-73
3-1
Instrument Panel Overview
3-2
The main components of the instrument panel are the
following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-24.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-6.
C. Cruise Control (If Equipped). See Cruise Control on
page 3-10.
D. Horn. See Horn on page 3-5.
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-26.
F. Windshield Wiper Lever. See Windshield Wiper
Lever on page 3-8.
G. Heated Seats (If Equipped). See Heated Seats on
page 1-5.
H. Fog Lamps (If Equipped). See Interior Lamps on
page 3-15.
I. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-4.
J. Traction Control. See Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light on page 3-32.
K. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-41.
L. Trunk Release Button/Dimmer Switch. See
Trunk/Liftgate on page 2-13 /Interior Lamps on
page 3-15.
M. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-10.
N. Climate Control. See Climate Control System
on page 3-17.
O. Automatic Transaxle Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transaxle Operation on page 2-23.
P. Power Windows. See Power Windows on page 2-17.
Q. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-41.
3-3
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
near the center of the
instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
3-4
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work. Make sure the hazard warning
flasher switch is all the way to the left for normal
turn signal operation.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your
vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the
wheel and pull the lever.
Then, move the wheel to a
comfortable position and
release the lever to
lock the wheel in place.
Horn
You can sound the horn by pressing the center of your
steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
Your vehicle may have a tilt wheel which allows you to
adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can
raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room
when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
3-5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
•
•
•
•
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamps
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass Feature
For additional information on the exterior lamps, see
Exterior Lamps on page 3-13.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
the lane change. The lever will return by itself when
you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-92 and for burned-out bulbs.
3-6
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high
beam to low, pull the turn signal lever all the way
towards you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be on.
Flash-to-Pass
The exterior lamp control has the following four
positions:
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
put the headlamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode
will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending upon
how much light is available outside of the vehicle.
; (Parking Lamps):
Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
53 (Headlamps):
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
Lamps On Reminder
Headlamps
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the
turn signal/multifunction lever.
Turning the control to this
position turns on the headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and the
lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
O(Exterior Lamp Control):
Turn the control with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
3-7
Windshield Wiper Lever
9:
Put the lever in this position to turn off the wipers.
&:
Put the lever in this position to set a delay
between wipes. Turn the band on the lever to set the
length of the delay (1, 2, or 3).
OO: Put the lever in this position for slow, steady
wiping cycles.
OOOO: Put the lever in this position for rapid
wiping cycles.
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
8:
Pull the lever down and release it for a single
wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original position.
For more cycles, hold the lever down before releasing it.
3-8
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, install new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Washer
Rear Window Wiper/Washer (Wagon)
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Pull the windshield wiper lever toward you to operate
the windshield wipers. Washer fluid will squirt onto
the windshield and the wipers will run for a few cycles
to clear the windshield. For more wash cycles, pull
the lever toward you and hold it there.
There is a band on the wiper lever to operate the rear
wiper/washer.
9:
Put the band in this position to turn off the rear
wiper.
Z:
Put the band in this position to turn on the rear
wiper. This position will be slow, steady wiping cycles.
=(Wash):
Hold the band in this position to spray
washer fluid on the rear window. The rear wiper will also
come on. Release the band when enough fluid has
been sprayed on the window. The rear wiper will stay
on until you turn the band to OFF.
3-9
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can not drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
The buttons for the cruise control are located on the
steering wheel.
IO(Cruise On/Off): Push this button to turn the
system on and off.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
IS (Resume/Accelerate):
Push this button to
make the vehicle resume a previously set speed or to
accelerate when cruise is already active.
–(Set/Coast): Press this button to set the speed or to
decrease the speed when cruise is already active.
3-10
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn
the cruise control back on.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Press the cruise on/off button. The indicator light
will come on.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can press the cruise control res/accel button.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the res/accel button the vehicle will keep
going faster until you release the button or apply
the brake. So unless you want to go faster, do not hold
the res/accel button.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press the set/coast button.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
3-11
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set/coast button, then release the
button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed.
• Press the res/accel button. Hold it there until you
get up to the speed you want, and then release
the button. To increase your speed in very
small amounts, press the button briefly. Each time
you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Press set/coast button until you reach the lower
speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set/coast button. Each time you do this, you
will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
3-12
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Applying the
brake or shifting into a lower gear will take you out
of cruise control. If you need to apply the brake or shift
to a lower gear due to the grade of the downhill
slope, you may not want to attempt to use your cruise
control feature.
Ending Cruise Control
To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
brake pedal.
Stepping on the brake will end the current cruise control
session only. Press the cruise on/off button to turn off
the system completely.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
Headlamps
See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-6 for
more information on the headlamps.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness in daylight when
the following conditions are met:
•
•
•
•
•
The ignition is on,
the exterior lamp band is in the AUTO position,
the transaxle is not in PARK (P),
the light sensor determines it is daytime, and
the parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, the low-beam headlamps will be
on at a reduced brightness. The taillamps, sidemarker
and other lamps will not be on. The instrument panel will
not be lit up either.
When you turn the exterior lamp band to the headlamp
position, your low-beam headlamps will come on.
The other lamps that come on with your headlamps will
also come on.
When you turn off the headlamps, the regular lamps will
go off, and your low-beam headlamps will come on to
the reduced brightness.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, move the shift
lever to PARK (P). The DRL will stay off until you move
the shift lever out of PARK (P).
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-13
Automatic Headlamp System
Fog Lamps
When it is dark enough outside, the headlamps will
come on automatically.
If your vehicle has this feature, use your fog lamps for
better visibility in foggy or misty conditions.
Your vehicle has a light
sensor located on top of the
instrument panel. Make
sure it is not covered, or the
headlamps will be on when
you don’t need them.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage or tunnel.
The button for your fog
lamps is located in the
instrument panel above
the radio.
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on or off.
When using fog lamps, the parking lamps or low-beam
headlamps must be on.
A light on the button will come on when the fog lamps
are actually on. Fog lamps will go off whenever the
high-beam headlamps come on. When the high-beam
headlamps go off, the fog lamps will come on again.
3-14
Interior Lamps
Entry Lighting
Instrument Panel Brightness
If the dome lamp is in the DOOR position, the lamps
inside your vehicle will come on when any door is
opened. In addition, the light will come on when the
remote keyless entry unlock button is pressed. It will stay
on for 20 seconds or until a door is opened. After the door
is opened the light will remain on and stay on for
20 seconds after the doors are closed, or until you put the
key in the ignition and turn the key to RUN. The light will
then gradually dim until it is no longer lit.
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
The thumbwheel for this
feature is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering column.
Dome Lamp
The dome lamp switch has three positions.
ON: The lamp will stay on as long as the switch is in
this position.
Turn the thumbwheel up to brighten the lights or down
to dim them.
DOOR: The lamp will come on when a door is opened.
See “Entry Lighting” for more information.
OFF: The lamp will not come on as long as the switch
is in this position.
Map Lamps
Your vehicle may have map lamps on the rearview
mirror. Press the button next to the lamp to turn it on
and off.
3-15
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery saver feature
designed to protect your vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system will
automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes.
Accessory Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or
CB radio.
The accessory power outlets are located in the front
and rear of the center console.
To use the outlet, remove the cover. When not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
3-16
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power outlet.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
To use the lighter, just push it in all the way and let
go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Climate Control System
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
To remove the ashtray, lift it straight up. To reinstall it,
press the ashtray down firmly until it is fully seated.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
3-17
Operation
To change the current mode, turn the right knob to
select one of the following:
H (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, and then directs most of
the remaining air to the floor outlets. Some air may be
directed toward the side windows.
6 (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the side window
outlets.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost modes. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
A (Fan):
Turn the knob in the center of the system
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the fan speed. The fan must be on to run the
air-conditioning compressor.
3-18
Temperature Control: Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air from
coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside
air and odors from entering your vehicle or to help cool
the air inside your vehicle more quickly. Press this button
to turn the recirculation mode on or off. When the button
is pressed, an indicator light above the button will come
on to let you know that it is activated. The air-conditioning
compressor comes on. The recirculation mode can be
used with vent, bi-level, or floor modes, but it cannot be
used with the defog or defrost modes. When you switch
to the defog or defrost modes the system will
automatically move from recirculation to outside air.
When you move the mode knob back to another mode,
the system will move back into recirculation. When the
car is turned off and back on the system will default to
outside air automatically.
AC (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air-conditioning system on or off. When A/C is pressed,
an indicator light above the button will come on to let
you know that air conditioning is activated.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to choose from to
clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the
defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and
warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to
remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
1. Select the vent mode.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
- (Defog):
3. Select A/C.
4. Select the recirculation mode.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is normal.
This mode directs half of the air to the
windshield and half to the floor outlets with a small
amount directed to the side windows. When you select
this mode, the system turns off recirculation
automatically and runs the air-conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in
the defog mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
1 (Defrost):
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield with some air directed to the floor vents.
In this mode, the system will automatically force outside
air into your vehicle and run the air-conditioning
compressor. Recirculation cannot be selected while in
the defrost mode.
3-19
Rear Window Defogger
Automatic Climate Control System
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
If your vehicle has this system, you can control the
heating, cooling and ventilation in your vehicle
automatically.
< REAR:
Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light above the
button will come on to let your know that the rear
window defogger is activated. Be sure to clear as much
snow from the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
15 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for approximately seven
minutes before turning off. The defogger can also be
turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off
the engine.
If your vehicle has heated outside mirrors, the mirrors
will also heat when the rear defogger is on. See Outside
Heated Mirrors on page 2-39 for more information.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.
3-20
Automatic Operation
To switch the temperature display from degrees
Fahrenheit to degrees Celsius, press and hold the
AUTO, ECON, and MODE buttons at the same time.
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is active
the system will control the inside temperature, the air
delivery, and the fan speed.
OFF: Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Put the fan knob on AUTO and press the AUTO
button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current set temperature, delivery mode
and fan speed.
When auto is selected, the air conditioning operation
and air inlet will be automatically controlled. The
air conditioning compressor will run when as
necessary. The air inlet will normally be set to
outside air. If it’s hot outside, the air inlet may
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help
quickly cool down your vehicle. The light on the
button will illuminate in recirculation.
2. Set the temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 71°F (22°C)
temperature setting and allow about two to three
minutes for the system to regulate. Turn the
temperature knob to adjust the temperature setting
as necessary. If you choose the temperature setting
of 60°F (15°C) the system will remain at the
maximum cooling setting. If you choose the
temperature setting of 90°F (32°C) the system will
remain at the maximum heat setting. Choosing either
maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or
cool any faster.
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the
top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This
sensor regulates air temperature based on sun
load, and also turns on your headlamps. See
“Sensor” later in this section for more information.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the
system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is
available. The length of delay depends on the
engine coolant temperature. Pressing the fan switch
will override this delay and change the fan to a
selected speed.
3-21
Manual Operation
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan
speed.
OFF: Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle.
A (Fan):
The knob with the fan symbol allows you to
manually adjust the fan speed. Turn it clockwise and
counterclockwise to increase and decrease the fan
speed. If the fan knob is on AUTO the system will
automatically control the fan speed.
MODE: Press this button to manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle; keep pressing the
button until the desired mode appears on the display.
Select from the following modes:
H (Vent):
This setting will deliver air to the instrument
panel outlets.
)(Bi-Level):
This setting will deliver warmer air to the
floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
6 (Floor):
This setting will deliver air to the floor
outlets.
For information on the defog and defrost modes see
“Defogging and Defrosting“ later in this section.
3-22
?(Recirculation):
Press this button to limit the
amount of outside air entering your vehicle. The light on
the recirculation button will glow. This is helpful when you
are trying to limit odors entering your vehicle and for
maximum air conditioning performance in hot weather.
Press this button again to allow outside air to enter the
vehicle. The light on the recirculation button will go off.
If you select recirculation while in defrost or defog, the
system will not switch to that mode. This is to prevent
fogging.
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the system
in recirculation for extended periods of time may cause
fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, select
either defog or front defrost. The air conditioning
compressor will run automatically to help dehumidify
the air.
ECON: Pressing this button will disable the air
conditioning compressor. A/C OFF will be displayed on
the screen. Press the button again to allow for
automatic operation of the air conditioning compressor.
0 (Defrost):
Sensor
A sensor located on top of
the instrument panel is
used by the automatic
climate control system to
adjust the automatic
operation of the system.
Do not cover this sensor.
Press the front defrost button to defrost
the windshield and side windows. The air conditioning
compressor will automatically run to help dehumidify the
air and dry the windshield. To turn defrost off, press
the AUTO or MODE button.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
<(Rear):
Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
Defogging and Defrosting
You can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture. Use the front
defrost button to defrost the front windshield.
-(Defog):
Use this setting to clear the windows of fog
or moisture. Press the mode button to select this
setting. This setting will deliver air to the floor and
windshield outlets. The air conditioning compressor will
automatically run to help dehumidify the air and dry
the windshield.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
15 minutes after the button is pressed. If you need
additional warming time, press the button again.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this
button will activate them.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
window with sharp objects.
3-23
Outlet Adjustment
For the type of filter to use, see Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 6-13.
Use the louvers located on the air outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the vehicle that may block
the flow of air into your vehicle.
1. Open the hood. Locate the passenger compartment
air filer access panel.
2. Peel back the hood weatherstrip from the
passenger’s side of the vehicle halfway to center.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger
compartment air filter. It is located underneath the hood
just below the windshield wiper arm on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
The filter traps most of the pollen from air entering the
Climate Control System. Like your engine’s air
cleaner/filter, it may need to be changed periodically to
insure system performance. For information on how
often to change the passenger compartment air
filter, see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
3-24
3. Use a tool to open the passenger compartment air
filter access door.
4. Remove any leaves or other debris from the
filter area.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
5. Release the two locking tabs and pull the filter out.
6. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter.
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
3-25
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will know how fast
you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and
economically.
3-26
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles or kilometers.
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. You may
wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new
odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, then that will be done.
If it can’t, it will be set at zero and a label must be put
on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed. If the mileage is
unknown, the label should then indicate “previous
mileage unknown”.
Trip Odometer
Your trip odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven since the trip odometer was last reset. To
reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
trip/reset button for about two seconds.
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not operate the engine
with the tachometer in the shaded warning area.
The maximum rpm is limited in PARK (P) and
NEUTRAL (N) to 4000 rpm by the vehicle’s computer.
This is to prevent engine damage.
3-27
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Air Bag Readiness Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag sensor, the air
bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
system, see Air Bag Systems on page 1-62.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-28
Battery Warning Light
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
The battery warning light
will come on briefly as a
check, when you turn
on the ignition. Then it
should go out when
the engine is started.
If the light does not come on when you start your
vehicle, have your vehicle serviced right away. This
condition may indicate your battery warning light is not
functioning properly. If this light comes on while you
are driving, be sure to turn off accessories such as the
radio and climate control system. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-29
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
If the brake system warning light comes on, there is a
brake problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
The BRAKE light is located
in the instrument panel
cluster.
A chime will also sound if the parking brake is not fully
released and the vehicle is moving. If it stays on
after your parking brake is fully released, it means you
have a brake problem.
The BRAKE light will also come on to indicate a low
brake fluid level. See Brakes on page 5-36 for
more information.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
{CAUTION:
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
problem.
When the ignition is on, the BRAKE light will come on
when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if
your parking brake doesn’t release fully.
3-30
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
To reset the system, do the following:
1. If you are driving, pull over when it is safe to do so.
2. Be sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, the anti-lock brake
system (ABS) warning light will come on briefly, as
a check, when you start your vehicle. If it does not, have
your vehicle serviced so that the light works properly
when it needs to.
The ABS light is located in
the instrument panel
cluster, to the left of the
engine coolant
temperature gage.
3. Turn off the ignition.
4. Then restart the engine.
If the light remains on after resetting the system or comes
on again while driving, your vehicle needs service. If the
ABS light is on, but the regular brake system warning light
is not on, you do not have anti-lock brakes, but you still
have regular brakes. Have your vehicle serviced right
away. If both brake lights are on, you do not have
anti-lock brakes, and there’s a problem with your regular
brakes as well. Have your vehicle towed for service. See
Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
If the light stays on longer than a few seconds after you
start your engine, or comes on and stays on while
you are driving, try resetting the system.
3-31
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
The Traction Control
System (TCS) light will
come on when the system
is limiting wheel spin.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The engine coolant
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal. The roads may be slippery if this light comes on.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the
engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-26 for more information.
The light will stay on for a few seconds after the system
stops limiting wheel spin. This light should also come
on for a few seconds when you start your vehicle.
If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause your vehicle to
overheat. See “Engine Overheating” under Engine
Coolant on page 5-23. Your vehicle could be
damaged, and it might not be covered by your
warranty. Never drive with the engine coolant
temperature warning light on.
This light will also come on when starting your vehicle.
If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.
3-32
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage measures the
temperature of the
vehicle’s engine. If the
indicator needle moves
into the shaded area, the
engine is too hot. A
temperature indicator light
will turn on and a chime
will sound.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, and the temperature indicator
light comes on, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
Low Coolant Warning Light
This light comes on briefly
when you turn your
ignition on.
If this light comes on and stays on, the coolant level in
your vehicle is low. If the light is on along with an
overheat warning, you may have a serious overheating
problem. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on
page 3-33.
Notice: Driving with the low coolant warning light
on could cause your vehicle to overheat. See
“Engine Overheating” under Engine Coolant on
page 5-23. Your vehicle could be damaged and the
damages might not be covered by your warranty.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for information
on what to do. Your vehicle should be serviced as soon
as possible.
3-33
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Service Engine Soon Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
3-34
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
Avoiding hard accelerations.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-8. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your retailer
for service as soon as possible.
Reducing vehicle speed.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
3-35
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your retailer can check the vehicle. Your retailer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
3-36
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE
ENGINE SOON light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery
has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This may take several days of routine driving. If
you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your
retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Light
If you have a low engine
oil pressure problem, this
light will stay on after
you start your engine, or
come on when you
are driving. This indicates
that your engine is not
receiving enough oil.
The engine could be low on oil, or could have some
other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
The oil light may also come on when the ignition is on
but the engine is not running, the light will come on as a
test to show you it is working, but the light will go out
when you turn the ignition to START. If it doesn’t come
on with the ignition on, you may have a problem with
the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
3-37
Change Engine Oil Light
If this light comes on and
stays on, it means that
service is required for your
vehicle.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 Engine Oil on
page 5-16 for more information.
Security Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
With this system, the
security light will flash as
you open the door if
your ignition is off.
For more information, see Passlock® on page 2-18.
3-38
Reduced Engine Power Light
This light will come on
briefly when you start the
engine.
This light is displayed when a noticeable reduction in
the vehicle’s performance may occur. Stop the vehicle
and turn off the ignition. Wait for 10 seconds and restart
your vehicle. This may correct the condition.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when
the reduced engine power light is on but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. The performance may
be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle. If
this light stays on, see your retailer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair.
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator
Light
This light is located on the
instrument panel cluster. It
goes on whenever the
Daytime Running Lamps
are on.
See Daytime Running Lamps under Exterior Lamps on
page 3-13 for further information.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Trunk Ajar Light
If this light comes on, your
trunk or liftgate is ajar. Try
closing the trunk or liftgate
again. Never drive with the
trunk or liftgate open.
Service Vehicle Soon Light
This light will come on if
you have certain
non-emission related
vehicle problems.
This light will come on
when your vehicle is low
on windshield washer fluid.
Take your vehicle in for service as soon as possible.
For more information, see Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 5-35.
3-39
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
Fuel Gage
speed up.
When the ignition is on,
the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left in your tank.
• The gage takes a few seconds to stabilize after the
ignition is turned on, and will go back to empty
when you turn the ignition off.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-98.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light will
come on. You still have a little fuel left, but you
should get more soon. See Low Fuel Warning Light on
page 3-40 for more information.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
3-40
The light next to the fuel
gage will come on briefly
when you are starting
the engine.
This light also comes on when the fuel tank is low on
fuel. When you add fuel the light should go off. If it
doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
Notice: Getting suntan lotion, hand lotion, or hand
cleaner on the radio, will soften the paint, and
the paint will eventually begin to peel. Repairs will
not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty. Try not to
get suntan lotion, hand lotion, or hand cleaner on
the radio. If you do, wipe the lotion or cleaner
off immediately.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Setting the Time
Press and hold the RCL button and at the same time
press the HR arrow or the MIN arrow until the correct
hour and minute appear on the display. The time can be
set with the ignition on or off.
3-41
AM-FM Radio
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The display will show the selection.
R TUNE
stations.
Q:
Press either arrow to select radio
R SEEK Q: Press the up or down arrow to go to the
next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
SCN (Scan): Press this button to scan stations. The
radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next station. Press this button again to stop
scanning.
Playing the Radio
ON (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.
3-42
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Using Automatic Set
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
Use this feature to automatically save the radio preset
pushbuttons with the stations with the strongest
radio signals.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
If the battery has been disconnected or a radio fuse has
been removed, the preset stations and time of day
will need to be reset.
A.SET (Automatic Set): Press this button to have the
radio automatically select the first 12 strongest radio
stations for FM and the six strongest radio stations
for AM.
To select the stations, perform the following:
1. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
2. Press and hold AM FM until you hear a beep.
The radio will begin to search the current band.
The radio will store the stations, starting from the
lowest frequency, to each preset pushbutton. A.SET
will appear on the display when the radio is
finished storing the stations.
3-43
Cancelling Automatic Set
The radio retains the previously stored stations so they
can be recalled when automatic set is canceled.
Press and hold A.SET until you hear a beep. A.SET will
no longer appear on the display.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or to decrease the bass.
TREB (Treble): Press the BASS knob lightly so it
extends, then pull then knob out slightly. Turn the knob
to increase or to decrease the treble. If a station is
weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
Push the knob back into it’s stored position when not
in use.
3-44
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, pull the VOL knob out
slightly. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the
right or the left speakers.
Push the knob back into it’s stored position when not
in use.
FADE: To adjust the fade between the front and the
rear speakers, turn the ring around the VOL knob.
Radio with CD
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The display will show your selection.
R TUNE Q: Press the up or down arrow to select
radio stations.
R SEEK Q: Press the up or down arrow to go to the
next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
SCN (Scan): Press this button to scan stations.
The radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next station. Press this button again to
stop scanning.
Playing the Radio
PUSH ON (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. Time
display is available with the ignition turned off.
3-45
Setting Preset Stations
Using Automatic Set
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM) by performing the following steps:
Use this feature to automatically save the radio preset
pushbuttons with the stations with the strongest
radio signals.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
If the battery has been disconnected or a radio fuse has
been removed, the preset stations and time of day
will need to be reset.
A.SET (Automatic Set): Press this button to have the
radio automatically select the first 12 strongest radio
stations for FM and the six strongest radio stations
for AM.
To select the stations, perform the following:
1. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
2. Press and hold AM FM until you hear a beep.
The radio will begin to search the current band.
The radio will store the stations, starting from the
lowest frequency, to each preset pushbutton. A.SET
will appear on the display when the radio is
finished storing the stations.
Cancelling Automatic Set
The radio retains the previously stored stations so they
can be recalled when automatic set is canceled.
Press and hold A.SET until you hear a beep. A.SET will
no longer appear on the display.
3-46
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Playing a CD
MODE: Press this button until BAS or TRE appears on
the display. Press the plus or minus buttons to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you
may want to decrease the treble.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. The
CD symbol will appear on the display. You can insert
a CD with the ignition off.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
MODE: To adjust the balance between the right and
the left speakers, press this button until BAL appears on
the display. Press the plus or minus buttons to move
the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Press the plus or minus buttons to move
the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
3-47
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PRV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
start of the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more
than once, the player will continue moving backward
through the CD.
2 NXT (Next): Press this pushbutton to go to the next
track. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more
than once, the player will continue moving forward
through the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Release it to play the track.
The display will show the elapsed time of the track.
3-48
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Release it to play the
track. The display will show the elapsed time of the track.
5 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn off
random play.
6 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. RPT will appear on the display. The
current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT again to
turn off repeat play.
Q TUNE SEEK R: Press the up arrow to go to the
start of the current or of the previous track. Press
the down arrow to go to the start of the next track. If
you hold either arrow or press it more than once,
the player will continue moving backward or forward
through the CD.
RCL (Recall): Press this button to see the track
number. Press this button again to see how long the
current track has been playing.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. The CD symbol will appear on the display
when a CD is loaded.
EJ (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CD Messages
If ERR appears on the display and the CD comes out, it
could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your retailer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
retailer when reporting the problem.
3-49
Radio with Cassette and CD
Playing the Radio
PUSH ON (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. Time
display is available with the ignition turned off.
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The display will show your selection.
Single CD Player Audio System Shown — Six-CD
CD Player Similar
R TUNE Q: Press the up or down arrow to select
radio stations.
R SEEK SCAN Q: Press the up or down arrow to go
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow until you
hear a beep. SCAN will appear on the display. The
radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then
go on to the next station. Press either arrow again
to stop scanning.
The radio will seek and scan only to stations that are in
the selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-50
Setting Preset Stations
Using Automatic Set
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM) by performing the following steps:
Use this feature to automatically save the radio preset
pushbuttons with the stations with the strongest
radio signals.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press the AUTO TONE arrow to select the
equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will be automatically stored for that
pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
If the battery has been disconnected or a radio fuse has
been removed, the preset stations and time of day
will need to be reset.
A.SET (Automatic Set): Press this button to have the
radio automatically select the first 12 strongest radio
stations for FM and the six strongest radio stations
for AM.
To select the stations, perform the following:
1. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
2. Press and hold AM FM until you hear a beep.
The radio will begin to search the current band.
The radio will store the stations, starting from the
lowest frequency, to each preset pushbutton. A.SET
will appear on the display when the radio is
finished storing the stations.
Cancelling Automatic Set
The radio retains the previously stored stations so they
can be recalled when automatic set is canceled.
Press and hold A.SET until you hear a beep. A.SET will
no longer appear on the display.
3-51
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Playing a Cassette Tape
BASS/TREB (Treble): Press and release this knob
until BASS or TREB appears on the display. Turn the
knob to increase or to decrease. The display will
show the bass or the treble level. If a station is weak or
noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If the ignition is on, the tape can be
inserted and will begin playing. The tape symbol
will appear on the display whenever a tape is inserted.
If you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the tape
may not be in squarely. Press EJ to remove the tape
and start over.
R AUTO TONE Q (Automatic Tone): Press either
arrow to select customized equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, news, pop, rock, and
classical. There is also a flat setting that has been
factory tuned for the best overall performance.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
press either arrow until CSTM is displayed.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
FADE/BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press and release
this knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the
knob to move the sound toward the right or the
left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release this knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move
the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
3-52
While the tape is playing, use the VOL,
BASS/TREB/FADE/BAL, and AUTO TONE controls just
as you do for the radio. The tape symbol will appear
on the display and an arrow showing which side of the
tape is playing.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a tape in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the tape will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
Your tape bias is automatically set when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
beginning of the current selection. Press this pushbutton
again to go to the previous selection on the tape.
R REW (Rewind): Press the down arrow to rewind
quickly within the tape. Press it again to return to playing
speed. The radio will play while the tape rewinds.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next
selection on the tape. The radio will play while the tape
advances.
Q FF (Fast Forward): Press the up arrow to advance
quickly within the tape. Press it again to return to
playing speed. The radio will play while the tape
advances.
3 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side of
the tape.
4 W (Dolby®): Press this button to remove
background noise. The double-D symbol will appear on
the display.
Dolby® Noise Reduction is manufactured under a
license from Dolby® Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby® and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby® Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
6 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a
selection over again. RPT will appear on the display.
The current selection will continue to repeat. Press this
pushbutton again to off repeat play.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
tape is playing. The inactive tape will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD TP (Tape) / AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
play a tape when listening to the radio. Press this button
to switch between the tape, CD, and DVD (if equipped)
if loaded. The inactive tape, CD, or DVD will remain
safely inside the radio for future listening.
EJ (Eject): Press this button, located to the left of the
cassette tape slot, to eject a tape. Eject may be
activated with the radio off.
3-53
Cassette Tape Messages
CD Adapter Kits
ERR (Error): If this message appears on the display,
the tape will not play because of one of the following
errors.
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player. Insert the adapter as you
would insert a normal tape and the adapter should
begin playing. The display and radio buttons will function
the same.
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
tape may be damaged and should not be used in
the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player
is working properly.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-72.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your retailer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
retailer when reporting the problem.
3-54
If the adapter cassette will not play, press the SIDE
pushbutton to reverse the adapter. If the adapter still will
not play, refer to the directions that came with the
adapter.
Playing the Single CD Player
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. The
CD symbol will appear on the display. You can insert
a CD with the ignition off.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
start of the current track. If you hold this pushbutton
or press it more than once, the player will continue
moving backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
5 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn off
random play. When in random play, press the PREV
pushbutton to repeat the current track one time.
6 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. RPT will appear on the display. The
current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT again to
turn off repeat play.
R REW (Rewind): Press and hold the down arrow to
rewind quickly within a track. Release it to play the
passage. The display will show the elapsed time of the
track.
Q FF (Fast Forward): Press and hold the up arrow to
advance quickly within a track. Release it to play the
passage. The display will show the elapsed time of the
track.
Q SEEK R: Press the up arrow to go to the start of
the current or of the previous track. Press the down
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If you
hold either arrow or press it more than once, the player
will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
RCL (Recall): Press this button to see the track
number. Press this button again to see how long the
current track has been playing.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
3-55
CD TP (Tape): Press this button to play a CD when
listening to the radio. Press this button to switch
between the tape, CD, and DVD (if equipped) if loaded.
The inactive tape, CD, or DVD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
EJ (Eject): Press this button, located to the left of the
CD slot, to eject a CD. Eject may be activated with either
the ignition or radio off.
If you eject a CD, but decide that you want to listen to
it, press the CD/TP button. This will pull the CD
back in and it will begin to play.
Playing the Six–Disc CD Player
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
3-56
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LD/EJ (Load/Eject): Press the LD side of this button to
load CDs into the CD player. This CD player will hold
up to six CDs.
To load or eject one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LD/EJ button. NUM will
appear on the display. Flashing numbers at the
bottom of the display indicate empty CD slots.
3. Press the pushbutton (1-6) for the CD slot to load
or to eject. WAIT will appear on the display.
If a CD is already loaded the CD will eject.
If the CD slot is empty, LOAD will appear on the
display, and a CD can be loaded.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
If you select an equalization setting for your CD, it will
be activated each time you play a CD.
If the radio is on or off, the CD will begin to play
automatically.
To load or eject all CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LD/EJ button.
If any CDs are loaded, EJT will appear on the
display and the CDs will begin to eject.
When all slots are empty, LOAD will appear on the
display.
3. Load, up to six CDs, in order, starting with slot 1.
Loading will continue until all six CDs are loaded
or load is stopped by pressing any other radio
button.
You can cancel the loading or the ejecting of a CD by
pressing the LD/EJ button once, if in NUM selection, or
twice, if the CD is already loading or ejecting.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
start of the current track. If you hold this pushbutton
or press it more than once, the player will continue
moving backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
5 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton once to hear
the tracks on the current CD in random, rather than
sequential, order. RDM will appear on the display.
Press this pushbutton twice to hear the tracks on all of
the CDs loaded in random, rather than sequential,
order. ALL RDM will appear on the display.
Press this pushbutton a third time to turn off random play.
6 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. RPT will appear on the display. The
current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT again to
turn off repeat play.
3-57
R REW (Rewind): Press and hold the down arrow to
rewind quickly within a track. Release it to play the
passage. The display will show the elapsed time of the
track.
Q FF (Fast Forward):
Press and hold the up arrow to
advance quickly within a track. Release it to play the
passage. The display will show the elapsed time of the
track.
Q CD SEEK R: Press the up arrow to go to the
previous CD. Press the down arrow to go to the next CD.
RCL (Recall): Press this button to see the track
number, press this button again to see how long the
current track has been playing.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD when
listening to the radio. Press this button to switch
between the tape, CD, and DVD (if equipped) if loaded.
The inactive tape, CD, or DVD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
3-58
CD Messages
If ERR appears on the display and the CD comes out, it
could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• It is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your retailer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
retailer when reporting the problem.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Headphones
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system works with the
vehicles audio system and includes a DVD radio, a
video display screen, two sets of wireless headphones,
and a remote control.
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones. The headphones are used to listen to the
DVD radio or an auxiliary device connected to the
RCA jacks. The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF
switch and a volume control.
Before You Drive
To use the headphones, turn the switch to ON. An
indicator light located on the headphones will illuminate.
If the light does not illuminate, the batteries may
need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section for more information. Switch the headphones
to OFF when not in use.
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE
system may or may not work until the temperature is
within the operating range. The operating range for the
RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below
140°F (60°C). If the temperature of your vehicle is
outside of this range, heat or cool the vehicle until the
temperature is within the operating range of the
RSE system.
The transmitters are located in the display above the
video screen. The headphones will shut off automatically
to save the battery power if the DVD system is shut
off or if the headphones are out of range of the
transmitters for more than three minutes. If you move
too far forward or step out of the vehicle, the
headphones will lose the audio signal.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
3-59
Battery Replacement
Stereo RCA Jacks
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Slide open the battery door located on the left side
of the headphones.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Slide the battery door shut.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen on
the overhead console. The RCA jacks allow audio or
video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device
such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the
RSE. Adapter connectors or cables may be required to
connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Refer
to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
3-60
The RCA jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack
(right) is for the video input. The white jack (middle) is
for the left audio input. The red jack (left) is for the right
audio input.
To use the auxiliary function, connect a camcorder or a
video game unit to the RCA jacks and turn on the
auxiliary device. If you want to view a DVD, insert the
DVD into the DVD radio. The system will automatically
switch to DVD and start to play. To switch between
the auxiliary device and the DVD, press the AUX button
on the DVD player or on the remote control. See
“DVD Radio” and “Remote Control” later in this section
for more information.
Audio Output
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at one time.
The only way to listen to the audio through the vehicle
speakers is if the front seat passengers select DVD
Family Mode using the AUX button on the radio. Audio
will still play through the wireless headphones.
There are three modes to the RSE system:
RSE: This is the default. When a DVD is inserted, the
rear speakers will be muted. The rear seat passengers
will be able to hear audio through the wireless
headphones. The front seat passengers will be able to
listen to the radio by pressing the AM FM button, or
listen to XM™ Satellite Radio Service (if equipped) or
CD, by pressing the AUX button, through the front
speakers.
DVD Family: When in RSE mode, press the AUX
button to switch to DVD Family. All passengers will be
able to hear audio through the vehicles speakers. Audio
will still be available through the wireless headphones.
DVD Aux: This is the default. When the RCA jacks
are connected, the rear speakers will be muted. The rear
seat passengers will be able to hear audio from the
auxiliary device through the wireless headphones. The
front seat passengers will be able to listen to the
radio by pressing the AM FM button, or listen to XM™
Satellite Radio Service (if equipped) or CD, by pressing
the AUX button, through the front speakers.
3-61
Video Screen
DVD Radio
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push forward on the release button on the DVD
display console.
2. Pull the screen down, away from you, and adjust its
position as desired.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen will shut off, but the DVD will
continue to play through the previously selected audio
source.
The video screen contains the transmitters for the
wireless headphones and the remote control. If the
screen is in the closed position, the signals will not be
available for the operation of the headphones or
the remote control.
Notice: Directly touching the video screen may
damage it. Do not touch the screen. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for more
information.
3-62
The DVD radio is located in the center of the instrument
panel.
The DVD radio can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD radio and by the buttons on the remote control.
See “Remote Control” later in this section for more
information.
The DVD radio works while the ignition is in RUN
or ACC.
The DVD radio is only compatible with DVDs authorized
for use in the United States and Canada (Region
Code 1). The DVD region code is printed on the jacket
of most DVDs. Regular audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW,
and MP3s can also be played by the DVD radio.
Playing a Disc
If an error message appears on the video screen or the
radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” and “DVD
Radio Error Messages” later in this section.
If a disc is already in the radio, press the play/pause
button on the remote control to start playing the disc.
DVD Radio Buttons
RSE: Press this button to pause the DVD. Press this
button again to play the DVD.
Press and hold this button for more than two seconds to
turn off the DVD system.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch between
RSE and DVD family when a DVD is playing.
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side
up, into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start.
Vehicle speaker volume, bass, treble, etc. may be
adjusted using the radio controls.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of
the copyright information or the previews. Some
DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished,
although there may be a delay of up to 30 seconds. If
the DVD does not begin playing the movie automatically,
press the RSE button on the radio. If the DVD still
does not play, refer to the on-screen instructions.
Press this button to switch between playing a CD or
listening to XM™ Satellite Radio Service (if equipped)
when a CD is playing.
Z (Eject/Load):
Press this button to eject a DVD or
CD. If a DVD or CD is ejected, but not removed,
pressing this button will load the DVD or CD.
3-63
Stopping and Resuming Playback
Remote Control
To stop playing a disc, press the stop button on the
remote control.
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the
ability of the RSE transmitter to receive signals from
the remote control. If the remote control does not seem
to be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section. Objects
blocking the line of sight may also affect the function
of the remote control.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button on
the remote control. The movie should resume play from
where it last stopped if the disc has not been ejected
and the stop button has not been pressed twice on the
remote control. If the disc has been ejected or the
stop button has been pressed twice on the remote
control, the disc will resume playing at the beginning of
the disc.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the radio to eject the disc. If a
disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed, the
radio will reload the disc after a short period of time. The
disc will be stored in the radio. The radio will not
resume play of the disc automatically.
3-64
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Keep
the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
Remote Control Buttons
z (Set-up Menu):
Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, and display mode
(normal, full, or zoom). The dynamic range compression
feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase
low audio produced by some DVDs.
e (Audio):
Press this button to display a menu that
will only appear when a DVD is playing. The format and
content of this function will vary for each disc.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this button
again. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
on and off.
v (Title):
Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to go to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
3-65
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter, title, and
track number selection.
}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press the button, to
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
\ (Clear):
Press this button, within 3 seconds after
inputting a numeric selection to clear all numeric inputs.
P (Illumination):
Press this button to turn the
remote control backlight on. The backlight will time out
after about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is
pressed while the backlight is on.
y (Main DVD Menu):
Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when using a DVD.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
3-66
q (Return):
Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button will operate only when a DVD is playing and a
menu is active.
| (Camera Angle):
Press this button to change
camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function will vary for each disc.
{ (Subtitle):
Press this button to turn on subtitles and
to move through subtitle options when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function will vary
for each disc.
[ (Fast Forward):
Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
s (Play/Pause):
Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
playing the DVD or CD.
When the DVD is playing, press the pause button then
press the fast forward button. The DVD will continue
playing in a slow play mode. To cancel slow play mode,
press the play/pause button.
u (Next Track/Chapter):
Press this button to advance
to the beginning of the next track or chapter. This
button may not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
DVD Display Error Messages
The video screen may display one of the following:
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed,
if a disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not
readable, or if the disc format is not compatible. The
disc will be automatically ejected from the radio.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed, if the
mechanism cannot play the disc. Severely scratched
or damaged discs may cause this error. The disc will be
automatically ejected from the radio.
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed,
if the disc is not a Region Code 1. The disc will be
automatically ejected from the radio.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed,
if the disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
No Disc: This message will be displayed, if no disc is
present when the play, eject, or DVD/AUX button is
pressed on the remote control or the eject, RSE, or AUX
button is pressed on the radio.
3. Close the battery door securely.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-67
DVD Radio Error Messages
DVD Distortion
The radio may display one of the following:
There may be an experience with video distortion when
operating cellular phones, scanners, CB radios,
Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile
fax, or walkie talkies.
No Disc: This message will be displayed, if no disc is
present when the play, eject, or DVD/AUX button is
pressed on the remote control or the eject, RSE, or AUX
button is pressed on the radio.
RSE Error: This message will be displayed for one of
the following reasons:
• If a disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not
readable, or if the disc format is not compatible.
The disc will be automatically ejected from the radio.
• If the mechanism cannot play the disc. Severely
scratched discs may cause this error. The disc
will be automatically ejected from the radio.
• If the disc is not a Region Code 1. The disc will be
automatically ejected from the radio.
• If the disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
3-68
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the DVD Player
When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and buttons,
use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage may result.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The Radio with Cassette and CD and the Radio with
Cassette and Six-Disc CD have a theft deterrent feature.
The instructions which follow explain how to enter
your secret code to activate the theft deterrent feature.
Read through all 10 steps before starting the
procedure.
The theft deterrent feature is designed to discourage
theft of your vehicle’s radio. It works by using a secret
code to disable all radio functions whenever battery
power is interrupted.
The theft deterrent feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the radio plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If the theft deterrent
feature is activated, the radio will not operate if stolen.
When the theft deterrent feature is activated, LOCK will
appear on the radio display to indicate a locked condition
anytime battery power has been interrupted. If the battery
loses power for any reason, you must unlock the radio
with the secret code before it will operate.
If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between
any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time
and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
1. Write down any four-digit number from 0000 to
9999 and keep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to RUN.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 5 and 6 pushbuttons at the same time for
five seconds. -- -- -- -- will appear on the display.
Next you will use the secret code number which you
have written down.
3-69
5. Press the SEEK/SCAN up arrow to make the first
digit agree with your code.
6. Press the SEEK/SCAN down arrow to make the
second digit agree with your code.
7. Press the TUNE up arrow to make the third digit
agree with your code.
8. Press the TUNE down arrow to make the fourth
digit agree with your code.
9. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written
down. REP will appear on the display to indicate
that Steps 5 through 8 need to be repeated to
confirm your secret code.
10. Press AM-FM again. SEC will appear on the display
to indicate that the radio is secure.
If SEC is not displayed, but displays Err1, Err2, or
LOCK, the theft deterrent feature is already set
to another code. See “Disabling the Theft-Deterrent
Feature” later in this section.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature
After a Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on. -- -- -- -- will appear on the
display.
2. Preform Steps 5 through 8 from the “Activating the
Theft-Deterrent Feature” earlier to enter your
secret code.
3. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written
down. SEC will appear on the display, indicating the
radio is now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code, the display will momentarily
show an error message and all radio functions will
continue to be disabled. If -- -- -- -- appears on
the display, you can try to enter your secret code again.
If you enter the wrong code three times, LOCK will
appear on the display. Contact your retailer. Your retailer
is authorized to obtain the factory programmed code
that is assigned to the radio to reset the system.
If you forget your code, if the theft deterrent feature is
accidentally activated with an unknown code, or if
the radio is in the locked mode, contact your retailer.
3-70
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Radio Reception
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
AM
Preform Steps 1 through 9 from the “Activating the
Theft-Deterrent Feature” earlier to enter your secret
code. OFF will appear on the display indicating the theft
deterrent feature is off.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
If OFF does not appear on the display, the wrong code
was entered. If you enter the wrong code, the display will
momentarily show an error message and all radio
functions will continue to be disabled. If -- -- -- -- appears
on the display, you can try to enter your secret code
again.
If you enter the wrong code three times, LOCK will
appear on the display. Contact your retailer. Your retailer
is authorized to obtain the factory programmed code
that is assigned to the radio to reset the system.
FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
If you forget your code, if the theft deterrent feature is
accidentally activated with an unknown code, or if
the radio is in the locked mode, contact your retailer.
3-71
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or they may cause failure of the tape player.
The tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
30 hours of use. The radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that the tape player has been used for 30 hours
without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message
appears on the display, the cassette tape player
needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it should
be cleaned as soon as possible to prevent damage
to the tapes and player. If there is a reduction in sound
quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape
or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no
improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your retailer.
3-72
The cut tape detection feature of the cassette tape
player may identify the cleaning cassette as a damaged
tape, in error. If the cleaning cassette ejects, insert
the cassette at least three times to ensure thorough
cleaning.
A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a
cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head
can be used. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not
clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After the player is cleaned, insert a cassette tape, press
and hold the eject button for five seconds to reset the
CLEAN indicator. CLEAN will no longer appear on
the display to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before the tape player is
serviced.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the rear quarter panel.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due
to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
3-73
✍ NOTES
3-74
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-6
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9
Steering ......................................................4-10
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12
Passing .......................................................4-13
Loss of Control .............................................4-14
Driving at Night ............................................4-15
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-17
City Driving ..................................................4-20
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-21
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-23
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-24
Winter Driving ..............................................4-26
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ........4-30
Towing ..........................................................4-32
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-32
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-32
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-34
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-40
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Drunken Driving
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-11.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
4-2
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
4-3
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above.
4-4
A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled
his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of
0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a
collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent,
the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. Also see Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
4-5
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that is
only an average. It might be less with one driver and as
long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age,
physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But
even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph
(100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of
distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space
between your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-31.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear
the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel the
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-8
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
reengage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control” under
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-6.
This light should come on
briefly when you start the
engine. If it stays on or
comes on while you
are driving, there’s a
problem with your traction
control system.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 3-32. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to. You
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck
in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or
Snow on page 4-30.
4-9
To turn the system off,
press the trac switch.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
The traction control system warning light will come on
and stay on. If the system is limiting wheel spin when you
press the button, the warning light will come on – but the
system won’t turn off right away. It will wait until there’s no
longer a current need to limit wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The traction control system
warning light should go off.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
4-10
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their work
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can
demand too much of those places. You can lose
control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can not; there is not
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you
have anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-11
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
4-13
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
4-14
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Driving at Night
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: It
helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have
anti-lock, then in a braking skid (where the wheels are
no longer rolling), release enough pressure on the
brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores
steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily
when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels
are rolling, you will have steering control.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
4-15
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you can not see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
4-16
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
And, if your tires do not have much tread left, you will
get even less traction. It is always wise to go slower and
be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads.
4-17
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can not, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-18
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you can not avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive through them very slowly.
4-19
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
City Driving
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just your
parking lamps — to help make you more visible to
others.
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-54.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-20
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Freeway Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-21.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-21
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
4-22
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts at
Saturn retailers all across North America. They will be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
4-23
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
4-24
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
CAUTION:
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have your engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
•
•
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
•
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
(Continued)
4-25
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Also see Tires on page 5-54.
4-26
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Keep your traction control system on. It improves your
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.
Even though your vehicle has a traction control system,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
the road conditions. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-9.
Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you will
want to brake very gently, too. (If you do have anti-lock,
see Braking on page 4-6. This system improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road.) Whether you have the anti-lock braking
system or not, you will want to begin stopping sooner
than you would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock
brakes, if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on
the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily
to get the most traction you can.
4-27
Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake so
hard that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide.
Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can not reach:
around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or
an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid
sudden steering maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
4-28
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can not see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-29
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you are stuck, but
you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you
are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible.
Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
“Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out.”
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-68.
4-30
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. You should turn
your traction control system off. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9. Then shift back and
forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By
slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse
directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may
free your vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few
tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use
your recovery hook. If you do need to be towed out, see
Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
{CAUTION:
The recovery hook, when used, is under a lot
of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hook at a sideways angle.
The hook could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use the recovery hook to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
Using the Recovery Hook
Your vehicle is equipped with a recovery hook. The
recovery hook is provided at the rear of your vehicle. It
can only be used for pulling your vehicle out.
4-31
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
4-32
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-23.
Dinghy Towing
You may dinghy tow your vehicle from the front following
these steps:
6. Close the hood.
7. Release the parking brake.
Once you have reached your destination replace the
IGN 0/3/CR and IGN 1/2 fuses.
Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (110 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (110 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC to unlock the steering
wheel.
3. Shift your transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Open the lid on the underhood fuse block and
remove the IGN 0/3/CR and IGN 1/2 fuses.
Refer to the underside of the underhood fuse block
cover for specific fuse locations.
5. Close the lid on the underhood fuse block and store
the two fuses in a safe place.
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Never have your vehicle towed from
the rear.
4-33
Dolly Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-34
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Example 2
Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the seating
capacity and the total weight your vehicle can properly
carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight. If
your vehicle has the Tire and Loading Information label,
Example 1, the label is attached to the center pillar, near
the driver’s door latch. If your vehicle has the
Tire-Loading Information label, Example 2, the label is
on the rear edge of the driver’s door.
4-35
The Tire and Loading Information label also gives you
the size and recommended inflation pressure for
the factory-installed, original equipment tires on your
vehicle. For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 5-54 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-61.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.).
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4-36
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-40, for important information on towing a
trailer, towing safety rules and trailering tips.
Example 1
Example 2
Loading Your Vehicle
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1=
B
C
Total
Item
Description
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
750 lbs (340 kg)
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
4-37
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight. Also see Towing
a Trailer on page 4-40.
Certification Label
Example 3
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
C
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
4-38
The Certification label is found on the rear edge of the
driver’s door. It tells you the gross weight capacity
of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
for either the front or rear axle.
If you do have a heavy load, spread it out. Don’t carry
more than 167 pounds (75 kg) in your trunk.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
4-39
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
4-40
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what
the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to
work harder against the drag of the added weight. The
engine is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat.
What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer
Weight of the Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs. (454 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at:
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
In Canada, write to:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada, Ltd.,
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa,
Ontario L1H 8P7
4-41
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-34 for more information about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
4-42
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label, See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-34. Then be sure you do not go over
the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight
of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
Safety Chains
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If
you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 2-31. Dirt and water can, too.
Trailer Brakes
Because your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do not try to
tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you
do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
4-43
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-44
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of the engine and the transaxle overheating.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P).
When parking uphill, turn your wheels away from
the curb. When parking downhill, turn your wheels
into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailer
wheels.
3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-45
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
information. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (do not
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drive belt, cooling
system and brake system. Each of these is covered in
this manual, and the Index will help you find them
quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review this
information before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-26.
4-46
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ......................................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-10
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-16
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-20
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-23
Engine Coolant .............................................5-23
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-26
Engine Overheating .......................................5-26
Cooling System ............................................5-29
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-34
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-35
Brakes ........................................................5-36
Battery ........................................................5-39
Jump Starting ...............................................5-40
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-46
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-46
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps ....................................5-47
Fog Lamps ..................................................5-49
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
(Sedan) ...................................................5-49
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
(Wagon) ...................................................5-50
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps (Sedan) .............................5-50
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps (Wagon) ............................5-52
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-53
Tires ..............................................................5-54
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-61
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-62
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-64
Buying New Tires .........................................5-64
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-65
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-67
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-67
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Chains ..................................................5-68
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-69
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-70
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-81
Appearance Care ............................................5-82
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-82
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-85
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-85
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-85
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-87
Finish Damage .............................................5-88
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-88
5-2
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-88
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-89
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-90
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-90
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-91
Electrical System ............................................5-91
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-91
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-91
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-92
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-92
Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-98
Service
Your Saturn retailer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go to your
retailer for all your service needs. You will get genuine
Saturn parts and Saturn-trained and supported
service people.
We hope you will want to keep your Saturn vehicle all
Saturn.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-10.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-71.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-15.
5-4
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your retailer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87
or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use
a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. A
little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is
considered normal. This does not indicate a problem
exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you are
using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
5-5
Gasoline Specifications
California Fuel
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of
Automobile Manufacturers at
www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-34 )
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized Saturn retailer
for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is
caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not
be covered by your warranty.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Canada Only
5-6
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly.
You should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. General Motors
recommends that you buy gasolines that are advertised
to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean. If your
vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, try a different brand of gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized Saturn retailer
for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Filling Your Tank
The fuel filler cap is
located behind a hinged
door on the passenger’s
side of your vehicle. It
is tethered to the door to
prevent loss while
refueling. Make sure that
water, snow, and dirt
are kept away from the
filler cap and filler
pipe nozzle.
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). It will require about 1/2 of a turn to
remove the cap. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if
you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the
right (clockwise).
{CAUTION:
If you get fuel on yourself and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too
quickly.
CAUTION:
5-8
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outside
of Your Vehicle on page 5-85.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) about 1/4 of a turn until you hear three
clicks. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off
or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere and may cause the
malfunction indicator lamp to come on. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-34.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and
may damage your fuel tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-34.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle located
inside the vehicle.
3. Lift the hood, release
the hood prop from its
retainer and put the
hood prop into the slot
in the hood.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up on the
secondary hood release lever.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer. Then just let the
hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.2L L4 (L61) engine, you’ll see the following:
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20 for more information.
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for
more information.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for
more information.
D. Power Steering Fluid. See Power Steering Fluid on
page 5-34 for more information.
E. Brake Master Cylinder Fluid. See Brakes on
page 5-36 for more information.
F. Battery. See Battery on page 5-39 for more
information.
G. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23 for more information.
H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-35 for more information.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly.
5-13
When you open the hood on the 3.0L V6 (L81) engine, you’ll see the following:
5-14
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20 for more information.
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for
more information.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for
more information.
D. Brake Master Cylinder Fluid. See Brakes on
page 5-36 for more information.
E. Power Steering Fluid. See Power Steering Fluid on
page 5-34 for more information.
F. Battery. See Battery on page 5-39 for more
information.
G. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23 for more information.
H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-35 for more information.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly.
5-15
Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the MIN mark, then you will need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-98.
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
2.2L L4 (L61) Engine
2.2L L4 (L61) Dipstick Shown, 3.0L V6 (L81) Similar
5-16
3.0L V6 (L81) Engine
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-17
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle. However, if it is going to be 0°F
(–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not available,
you may use SAE 10W-30.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-18
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil (GM Oil
Life System)
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A Change Engine Oil light will come on.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next two
times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your retailer has trained service people
who will perform this work using genuine Saturn
parts and reset the system. It is also important to check
your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
How to Reset the Oil Life System
The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change your
engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime your
oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when
the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where
you change your oil prior to a Change Engine Oil light
being turned on, reset the system.
After changing the engine oil, reset the system by
performing the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three
times within five seconds.
If the Change Engine Oil light is flashing, the
system is reset. The light will flash for up to
30 seconds or until the ignition is turned off.
If the light comes on again and stays on for 30 seconds
at the next ignition cycle, it did not reset. You will
need to reset the system again.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change
your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
5-19
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a
service station or a local recycling center for help.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter every 15,000 miles (25 000
km) and replace every 30,000 miles (50 000 km). If
you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains “caked” with dirt, a new
filter is required.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
location of air cleaner/filter.
5-20
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful
working on the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
1. Remove the hose clamp that is on the inlet duct on
the cover and pull off the hose.
2. Release the two clips and turn the cover upward to
unhook the hinges.
If you want to replace the engine air cleaner/filter
yourself, use the following steps.
5-21
3. Pull the air cleaner/filter box cover out and remove
the air filter element from the air filter box. If the
element is dirty, you should replace it. If the element
is only dusty, it may be cleaned by blowing
compressed air through it from the clean side.
Make sure you are away from your engine
compartment when cleaning the air filter with
compressed air.
5-22
4. Wipe all dust from inside the housing and inspect
the air cleaner and air inlet tube for cracks, cuts
and deterioration. The air inlet tube must be
replaced if it is damaged.
5. Install the air filter element, hose, hose clamp and
cover.
6. Latch the two clips.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Engine Coolant
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A
transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to retailer’s service
department and have it repaired as soon as possible.
You may also have your fluid level checked by your
retailer or service center when you have your oil
changed.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 100,000 miles
(166 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeled
other than DEXRON®-III may damage your vehicle,
and the damages may not be covered by your
warranty. Always use DEXRON®-III labeled automatic
transaxle fluid.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-26.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-23
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-24
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your retailer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The surge tank is located
on the driver”s side of the
engine compartment.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for more information
on location.
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the Cold
line (surge tank seam). When your engine is warm,
the level should be at the Cold line or a little higher.
If the low coolant light comes on and stays on, it means
you’re low on engine coolant. See Low Coolant
Warning Light on page 3-33.
5-25
Adding Coolant
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool. See Engine Overheating on page 5-26
for instructions on “How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank.”
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
If you replace your coolant surge tank pressure cap, a
Saturn cap is required.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
5-26
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage and a coolant
temperature warning light on your vehicle’s instrument
panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on
page 3-33 and Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light on page 3-32. You will also find a low coolant level
warning light on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See
Low Coolant Warning Light on page 3-33.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-27
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant light, can
indicate a serious problem. See Low Coolant Warning
Light on page 3-33.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
coolant light, but see or hear no steam, the problem may
not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a
little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner and it’s on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. Try to minimize engine load. If you’re in a traffic
jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the
highest gear while driving.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about ten minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you’re parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-28
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Fan
5-29
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
The coolant level should be at the COLD line (surge
tank seam). If it is not, you may have a leak at the
radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or
somewhere else in the cooling system.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-30
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-23 for more information.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Never turn the cap when the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant
surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-31
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-32
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about one-quarter of a
turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This
will allow any pressure still left to be vented out the
discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the
COLD line.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to the COLD line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight.
5-33
Check the level in the surge tank when the cooling
system has cooled down. If the coolant is not at the
proper level, repeat Steps 1 through 3 and reinstall the
pressure cap. If the coolant isn’t at the proper level when
the system cools down again, see your retailer.
Power Steering Fluid
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the “C” mark. If necessary, add
only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.
What to Use
The power steering fluid reservoir is located toward the
front of the engine compartment on the driver’s side
of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-34
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
When you need windshield or rear window (wagon
models) washer fluid be sure to read the instructions
before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in
an area where the temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
Adding Windshield Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer fluid symbol
printed on it and add
washer fluid until the tank
is full.
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-35
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
5-36
So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-30.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
Care on page 5-82.
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake
fluid.
5-37
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly).
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-38
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to Saturn torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your retailer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your brakes
adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate or heavier
stop, then your brakes might not adjust correctly. If you
drive in that way, then — very carefully — make a few
moderate brake stops about every 1,000 miles
(1 600 km), so your brakes will adjust properly.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
Saturn replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may
no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco® battery. When it is time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-39
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-40 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Contact your Saturn retailer to learn how to prepare
your vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-69.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
5-40
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or in the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save your radio!
5-41
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the ACDelco® battery
installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right amount of
fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care
of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-42
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts, too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Remove the terminal cover and connect the red
positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. The positive (+) terminal
on your vehicle is covered by a red protector cap
which must be removed before you connect
the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery.
5-43
7. Do not let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to
the negative (−)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
5-44
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter to disarm
your security system (if equipped).
12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
5-45
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
Bulb Replacement
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
For the type of bulb to use, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 5-52.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your retailer.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
Halogen Bulbs
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
5-46
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
1. Open the hood and secure it with the prop rod.
4. Remove fasteners from headlamp assembly.
2. Remove push-pin fasteners from grill assembly.
3. Tilt grill assembly forward and lift it up to remove it
from the body of the vehicle.
5-47
5. Push headlamp housing lever up to disengage
headlamp housing from headlamp housing
pocket.
7. Disconnect the wire connector from the bulb by
lifting the lock tab and pulling it away from the
plastic base.
6. Turn the bulb socket being replaced
counterclockwise one–quarter of a turn while
pressing the socket in firmly. Pull the socket
rearward until the bulb clears the headlamp housing,
and lift it up to access the bulb.
8. Remove the bulb assembly and replace it with the
appropriate bulb.
5-48
Fog Lamps
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) (Sedan)
1. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp cover
by pulling down on the cover edges.
2. Turn the bulb socket being replaced
counterclockwise one–quarter of a turn and remove
the bulb.
3. Replace it with the appropriate bulb.
1. Reach up from underneath the front body panel
and turn the bulb socket counterclockwise one–
quarter of a turn while pressing the socket in firmly.
Pull the socket rearward until the bulb clears the
fog lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the wire connector from the bulb by
lifting the lock tab and pulling it away from the
plastic base.
3. Remove the bulb assembly and replace it with the
appropriate bulb.
5-49
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) (Wagon)
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps (Sedan)
1. Open the liftgate.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp cover
by pulling down on the cover edges.
2. Pull back with interior trim.
3. Turn the bulb socket being replaced
counterclockwise one–quarter of a turn and remove
the bulb.
4. Replace it with the appropriate bulb.
5-50
3. Remove fasteners from backside of taillamp
housing.
4. Remove taillamp housing from body of vehicle.
5. Turn the bulb socket being replaced
counterclockwise one–quarter of a turn while
pressing the socket in firmly. Pull the socket
rearward until the bulb clears the taillamp housing.
6. Replace it with the appropriate bulb.
5-51
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps (Wagon)
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Headlamps
High Beam
Low Beam
Front Park/Turn Lamps
Front Side Markert Lamps
Stop/Taillamps
Rear Turn Lamps
Back-up Lamps
CHMSL
Fog Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the interior access trim panel.
3. Turn the bulb socket being replaced
counterclockwise one–quarter of a turn while
pressing the socket in firmly. Pull the socket
rearward until the bulb clears the taillamp housing.
4. Replace it with the appropriate bulb.
5-52
Bulb Number
—
9005 HB39441732
9006 HB49441733
34571999381
W5W12092811
P21/5W21019520
P21W21019521
P21W21019520
PC16825085970
880L12450143
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Windshield
Wipers, Blade Check” under Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-13. Here’s how to remove the wiper blades:
1. Turn on the wipers to the low wipe setting.
2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at the
outer positions of the wiper pattern. The blades
are more accessible for removal/replacement while
in this position.
3. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
4. While holding the wiper arm away from the glass,
push the release clip from under the blade
connecting point and pull the old blade assembly
down toward the glass to remove it from the
wiper arm.
5. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release clip “click” into
place.
5-53
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
CAUTION:
5-54
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
car tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC
Spec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s
specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications
meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.
(C) Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may have the date of
manufacture.
Passenger Car Tire Example
5-55
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-65.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For more information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-61 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
Compact Spare Tire Example
5-56
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-81 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-69.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-61.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter “T” as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(G) Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC
Spec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s
specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications
meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-81 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
5-57
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger car tire size.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is “70,” as shown in item “C” of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
70% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U. S.
Tire and Rim Association.
5-58
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and the speed rating of a tire. The load
range represents the load carrying capacity a tire is
certified to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from “A” to “Z”.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can
also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to its
width.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
before a tire has built up heat from driving. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-61.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
5-59
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to
279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of
a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-61 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants
a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds
(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward
when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand and or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
5-60
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on page 5-64.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire
information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-65.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-34.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation pressure. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-34.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
The tire and loading information label, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34, for the location
of your vehicle’s tire and loading information label.
5-61
When to Check
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Check your tires once a month or more.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Check
the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold.
Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
5-62
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-64 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-67 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for scheduled rotation intervals.
{CAUTION:
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
If you are towing your Saturn vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground, the transaxle and tire
maintenance should be scheduled by mileage
accumulated through both driving and towing, not to
driven (odometer) mileage. Tire wear will reflect actual
“rolling” mileage and may be greater than expected
for the current odometer mileage.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel bolts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a Flat
Tire” in the Index.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-Loading
Information label. Make certain that all wheel bolts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Bolt Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-98.
5-63
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
5-64
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires your vehicle
needs, look at the tire and loading information label. For
more information about this label and its location on
your vehicle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a
Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same TPC
Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have
tires that are designed to give proper endurance,
handling, speed rating, load range, traction, ride and
other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your
tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number
will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle. See “Compact Spare
Tire” in the index.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on Saturn passenger cars and
light trucks may vary with respect to these grades,
they must also conform to federal safety requirements
and additional General Motors Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-65
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
5-66
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel bolts keep coming loose, the
wheel and wheel bolts should be replaced. If the wheel
leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired). See your Saturn
Retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your retailer will know the kind of wheel or wheel bolt
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels or wheel
bolts, replace them only with new Saturn original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel and wheel bolts for your Saturn.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels or wheel
bolts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It
could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured. Always
use the correct wheel and wheel bolts for
replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70 for more
information.
5-67
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new Saturn original
equipment wheel.
Don’t use tire chains. There’s not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels. If you do find traction devices
that will fit, install them on the front tires.
5-68
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-69
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire.
CAUTION:
5-70
(Continued)
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
(Sedan)
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
The equipment you’ll need is located in the trunk.
1. Open the jack access door on the left side panel of
the trunk.
2. Remove the nut that holds the jack in place and
remove the jack together with the wheel wrench.
5-71
3. Lift the trunk liner and place the plastic hook in the
lip of the trunk.
4. Remove the nut that holds down the spare tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
(Wagon)
5. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-81
6. The wheel wrench is held in place by two clips
which are attached to the jack. Remove the
wheel wrench from the jack.
7. Fold out the socket portion of the wrench from the
handle.
The equipment you’ll need is in the cargo area.
5-72
5. The wheel wrench is held in place by two clips
which are attached to the jack. Remove the
wheel wrench from the jack.
6. Fold out the socket portion of the wrench from the
handle.
1. Lift up the spare tire cover by the handle. Fold the
side panels in and then attach the cover to the
liftgate with the hook provided.
2. Remove the nut that holds down the spare tire.
3. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-81
4. Remove the wing-bolt that holds the jack in place
and remove the jack together with the wheel
wrench.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and wheel
wrench (B).
5-73
Removing the Wheel
You must take off the wheel cover or hubcap to reach
the wheel bolts.
For steel wheels with full plastic covers and aluminum
wheels with large circular center caps, do the following:
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
1. Loosen all five hex-shaped plastic caps by turning
the wrench counterclockwise. Do not try to remove
plastic caps from the cover or center cap.
2. Pull the cover or center cap away from the wheel
and place it in the trunk.
When reinstalling full plastic covers or center caps,
tighten all five plastic caps hand snug with the aid of the
wheel wrench and tighten them with the wheel wrench
an additional one–quarter of a turn.
2. The jack has a bolt head at the end. Attach the
wheel wrench to the jack bolt head and rotate
the wheel wrench clockwise (to the right). That will
raise the lift head a little.
3. Move the jack over to where the flat tire is.
5-74
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
{CAUTION:
4. Position the lift head at the jack location nearest the
flat tire. Your vehicle has jack notches. Position the
jack in the notch near the tire being changed,
but make sure all of the jack lift head is touching
the jacking flange under the body. Do not place the
jack under a body panel.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
5. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-75
9. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
7. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
8. Take off the tire and wheel.
5-76
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel bolts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on wheel bolts. If you
do, the wheel bolts might come loose. Your
wheel could fall off, causing a serious
accident.
10. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
11. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut by hand
until the wheel is held against the hub.
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
5-77
13. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel bolts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
bolts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-98 for the wheel bolt
torque specification.
14. Lower the jack all the way and remove the jack
from under the vehicle.
15. Tighten the bolts firmly with the wheel wrench.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened
wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
bolts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new Saturn original equipment wheel bolts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the bolts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-98 for the wheel
bolt torque specification.
5-78
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk
until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Sedan
5-79
3. Place the flat tire, face down, into the spare tire
compartment. When placing an aluminum flat tire
into the spare tire compartment, be very careful
to avoid scraping the wheel face on the hold-down
bolt and other hard surfaces. The hold-down
bolt should pass through the rear most wheel vent
hold. The flat tirel will protrude above the trunk
floor in this position.
4. Place the nut onto the hold-down bolt and tighten
down until it is snug.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can. See the storage instructions label to replace
your compact spare into your trunk or cargo area
separately.
Wagon
1. Place the wheel wrench into the clips on the jack.
2. Install the jack in the left side panel of the trunk
for sedans or the spare tire compartment for
wagons and secure as shown on the jacking
instruction label located in the trunk or cargo area.
5-80
Store the flat tire in the compact spare tire compartment
and secure the adapter, extension (aluminum wheel
only) and wing bolt. Store the jack and wheel wrench in
the foam tray.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare tire on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your compact spare tire is correctly inflated. The
compact spare tire is made to perform well at speeds
up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles
(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have your
full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want.
Of course, it is best to replace your spare with a full-size
tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer
and be in good shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’t
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught
on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use your compact spare tire on other vehicles.
And do not mix your compact spare tire or wheel
with other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your
compact spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-81
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you are cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use any of these unless this manual says you
can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Benzene
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Naphtha
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Carbon Tetrachloride
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well.
Gasoline
Acetone
Turpentine
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-89.
Lacquer Thinner
Here are some cleaning tips:
Paint Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can — before
they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
5-82
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any
loose dirt.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Do not saturate
the material and do not rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you have cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry
completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
5-83
Cleaning Vinyl
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do this more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you do not get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument
Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
5-84
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-89.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle
well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get
approved cleaning products from your retailer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-89. Don’t
use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or
that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
5-85
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-89.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces.
5-86
Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use
non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted
surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Windshield, Backglass and
Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels
Cleaning Tires
Your vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
5-87
Finish Damage
Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of
finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s
body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
5-88
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your Saturn retailer for more information on
purchasing the following products.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Car Wash Soap
Cleans Exterior
Non-Abrasive Wax
Made to use on
basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants, Spray on
wipe off.
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks,
fine scratches and other
light surface
contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
5-89
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
Description
Usage
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
fabrics, vinyl, leather and
carpet.
See your Saturn parts department for these products.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
5-90
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
Electrical System
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on your spare tire cover. It’s very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
•
•
•
•
your VIN,
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
paint information and
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-71.
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
the model designation,
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
5-91
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Floor Console Fuse Blocks
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by fuses. This greatly reduces the chance
of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical
problems.
There are three fuse blocks — the underhood fuse
block, the driver’s side floor console fuse block and the
passenger’s side floor console fuse block.
To identify and check fuses and relays, refer to the
Fuse Usage Chart on the inside surface of the
fuse panel door.
The driver’s side instrument panel is located by the
driver’s left leg.
Use a key or a coin to remove the fuse panel door and
access the fuses and relays.
5-92
Fuses
Usage
®
RADIO
WIPER
IGN 3
DEFOG LED
BTSI/BCM/
MIRROR
DIMMER
RR COMP LP
Relays
Usage
Audio, OnStar , Rear Seat DVD
(Option)
RR DEFOG
Rear Defogger
IGN 3
Ignition Switch
Windshield Washers and Wipers
(Front)
PARKLAMP
Park Lamps
HEADLAMP
Headlamps
Left Heated Seat Switch, Right
Heated Seat Switch, Air
Conditioning, Rear Defogger Relay
Rear Defog LED
Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock,
Body Control Module, Power Mirror
Dimmer Switch
Trunk Compartment Lamp
5-93
Fuses
LOCKS
Usage
Power Door Locks
Power Door Locks, Heated Mirror
BODY
Relay, Liftgate Latch
POWER SEAT Power Seat
FOG LAMP
Fog Lamps
Premium Sound System
PREM AMP/MCS
Amplifier
HEATED SEATS Seat Heater
RR WIPER/
Rear Wiper/Washer (Wagon)
SUN ROOF
The passenger’s side fuse block is located by the
passenger’s right leg.
Use a key or a coin to remove the fuse panel door and
access the fuses and relays.
5-94
Relays
POWER
WINDOW
DRIVER DOOR
UNLOCK RELAY
DOOR UNLOCK
RELAY
DOOR LOCK
RELAY
HEATED MIRROR
FOG LAMP
Usage
Power Windows, Power Sunroof
Driver Door Unlock
Door Unlock
Door Lock
Power Mirrors
Fog Lamps
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment
fuse block is located in the
forward part of the
engine compartment near
the battery.
Fuses
HVAC
BLOWER
HORN
Usage
Ignition switch
IGN 0/3/CR
Ignition switch
COOL 1
COOL 2
Cooling fan module
Right Headlamps
Left Headlamps
Anti-Lock Brake System
ABS 2
Anti-Lock Brake System
Air Conditioning System
Cigarette Lighter
AUX POWER
Power Outlet
I/P BATT RT
Passenger’s Side Instrument Panel
Fuse Block
CONTROLS
B+
Powertrain Control Module (2.2L L4
(L61)), Engine Control Module (3.0L
V6 (L81), Transaxle Control Module
(3.0L V6 (L81))
BCM 2
BCM/ECM/
CRUISE/ABS
Cooling fan module
ABS 1
Horn
L HDLP
A/C
Fuses
High Blower
R HDLP
LIGHTER
IGN 1/2
Usage
Body Control Module
Body Control Module, Engine
Control Module, Cruise Control,
ABS
EIS
Electronic Ignition System
(2.2L L4 (L61))
IGN
Ignition Coils (3.0L V6 (L81))
5-95
Fuses
INJ
Usage
FUEL PUMP
IGN 0
Usage
PARK LAMP
Front Park Lamps, Taillamps, Front
Marker Lamps, Rear Marker Lamps,
License Lamps, Radio Display
Lights, I/P Cluster Backlighting, I/P
Dimmer, Cigar Lighter Ring, Ashtray
Light, PRND321 Light, Climate
Control Switch Backlighting
Fuel Injectors (2.2L L4 (L61))
Backup Lamps, Coolant Level
BACK-UP/TURN
Switch
BRAKE
Fuses
Brake Lamps
Fuel Pump Relay
Park Neutral Position Switch,
Powertrain Control Module
CRUISE SW
Cruise Control Switch
CONTROLS
IGN 1
Cooling Fan Control Module,
Powertrain Control Module,
Transaxle (2.2L L4 (L61)),
Transaxle Control Module
(3.0L V6 (L81))
HAZARD
Hazard Flasher, HBTT (Headlamp
HI Beam Indicator), I/P Cluster
REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger
RADIO/ON-STAR
CD/DLC
Audio System, OnStar®, Rear Seat
DVD (Option)
Audio, Data Link Connector, (DLC),
Rear Seat DVD (Option)
IGN 1
Instrument Cluster, Coolant Level
Switch, Air Bag, Electronic
PRND321
ING 3
BCM/CLUSTER
Body Control Module, Instrument
Cluster, Dimmer Switch
ENG CNTL 1
3.0L V6 (L81) Engine
ENG CNTL 2
3.0L V6 (L81) Engine
ENG CNTL 3
3.0L V6 (L81) Engine
A/C DIODE
Air Conditioner Diode
5-96
Cruise Clutch Switch, Emissions
Controls, Air Conditioner Relay,
Heated Oxygen Sensor
Relays
Usage
A/C
Air Conditioning System
DRL
Daytime Running Lamp
HORN
Horn
MAIN
3.0L V6 (L81) Engine
WIPER
FUEL PUMP
REAR WIPER
Circuit
Breakers
WINDOWS/
SUNROOF
Usage
Power Window Relay, Sunroof
(3.0L V6 (L81))
WINDOW/
Power Window Relay, Sunroof and
SUNROOF/AIR Air Pump Relay (2.2L L4 (L61))
Wiper System
Fuel Pump System
Rear Wiper System (Wagon Only)
5-97
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
English
2.1 lbs.
Metric
0.95 kg
Cooling System
2.2L L4 (L61) Engine
7.4 quarts
7.0 L
3.0L V6 (L81) Engine
8.5 quarts
8.0 L
Engine Oil with Filter
5.0 quarts
4.7 L
Fuel Tank
15.7 gallons
59.4 L
Transaxle
6.9 quarts
6.5 L
Wheel Nut Torque
92 lb ft
125 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
5-98
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Pug Gap
2.2L L4 (L61)
F
Automatic
0.0450 inches
(1.14 mm)
3.0L V6 (L81)
R
Automatic
0.040 inches
(1.02 mm)
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-14
Maintenance Record .....................................6-15
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at Saturn want to help you keep your vehicle in good
working condition. But we do not know exactly how
you will drive it. You may drive very short distances only
a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may
use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive
it to work, to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your Saturn retailer.
6-2
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-34.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your Saturn
retailer do these jobs.
When you go to your Saturn retailer for your service
needs, you will know that Saturn-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using
genuine Saturn parts.
If you want to get service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-10.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine Saturn parts.
6-3
Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil light comes on, it means
that service is required for your vehicle. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600
miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over
a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your Saturn retailer has Saturn-trained
service technicians who will perform this work using
genuine Saturn parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil on page 5-16 for information on the Engine
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
When the Change Engine Oil light appears, certain
services, checks and inspections are required. Required
services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
recommended that your first service be Maintenance I,
your second service be Maintenance II and that you
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be
required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the Change
Engine Oil light comes on within ten months since
vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light comes on ten months
or more since the last service or if the light has not
come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-16. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20. An Emission Control Service. See footnote †.
•
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-54.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (k).
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 5-20. An Emission Control
Service.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Change automatic transaxle fluid
and filter (severe service only). See
footnote (h).
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
•
Replace engine fuel filter. An
Emission Control Service. See
footnote †.
•
6-6
•
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
Engine cooling system service (or
every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
3.0L V6 engine only: Replace
timing belt. An Emission Control
Service.
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
150,000
(240 000)
•
•
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
•
•
•
•
•
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc.
6-7
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine
Saturn parts as needed. To help ensure proper
operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and
pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator
and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air
bag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
latches, hood hinges and latches, glove box hinges,
sunroof (if equipped) and any folding seat hardware.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make
them last longer, seal better and not stick or squeak.
6-8
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-23 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) Or every 12 months, whichever occurs first. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your Saturn retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-23 for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
At Each Fuel Fill
Tire Inflation Check
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-54 for further
details.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
Cassette Tape Player Service
Clean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be done
every 50 hours of tape play. See Audio System(s)
on page 3-41 for further details.
6-9
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, contact
your retailer for service.
6-10
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-27 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but do not start the engine. Without
applying the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift
lever moves out of PARK (P), contact your
retailer for service.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to OFF in each shift lever position.
• The key should turn to OFF only when the shift lever
is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Engine Oil
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-16.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
only
Engine Coolant water and use
DEX-COOL® Coolant. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-23.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent Optikleen Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
Parking Brake 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Cable Guides lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
6-12
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Power
Steering
(Saturn Part
Power Steering No. 21007583 orFluid
GM Part No. U.S.
System
89021184, in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transaxle
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (Saturn
Secondary
Part No. 21038869 or GM Part No.
Latch, Pivots, U.S. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Spring Anchor or lubricant meeting requirements of
and Release NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Pawl
Hood, Trunk
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
and Door
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (Saturn
Part No. 21038869 or GM Part No.
Sunroof Track U.S. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
or lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
Weatherstrip No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
Conditioning
992887).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
3.0L V6 (L81)
2.2L L4 (L61)
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
3.0L V6 (L81)
2.2L L4 (L61)
Windshield Wiper Blade
Type – Shepherd’s hook
Length – 22.0 inches (56.0 cm)
Rear Wiper Blade – 13.0 Inches (33.0 cm)
*Bosch Part Number.
Saturn Part Number
90571362
AC Delco Part Number
—
21018826
22685727
—
52493319
—
09195166
12569190
FLR9LTE*
41–981
—
8–2221
09152402
—
—
—
6-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing
2.2L Four Cylinder (L61) Engine
6-14
3.0L V6 (L81) Engine
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-4
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ........................................................7-5
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ..................................................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ..................................................7-8
Reporting Safety Defects ..................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ...............................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ..................7-10
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-10
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your retailer and to Saturn. Together we are committed
to providing our customers with unparalleled service,
before, during and after the purchase of a Saturn
vehicle, for total customer satisfaction. We call this the
Saturn Difference. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be
resolved by your retailer’s sales or service departments.
If, for any reason, your ownership experience falls
below your expectations, we suggest you take
the following action:
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer Assistance
Liaison. Any member of the retail management team has
the authority and the desire to resolve your concerns.
Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.
7-2
STEP TWO: Should you need additional assistance,
contact the Saturn Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-553–6000. In Canada, contact the Saturn
Customer Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
A Saturn Customer Assistance Center team member will
handle your call and assist in providing product and
warranty information, the nearest retailer location,
roadside assistance, brochures, literature and discuss
any concerns you may have.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number. (You will find this
17-digit number on the vehicle registration or
title, on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash or
on your roadside assistance key card.)
• The name of your selling and servicing retail facility.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.
If you wish to write to the Saturn Customer Assistance
Center, our address is:
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24 Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
In Canada, write to:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
When contacting Saturn, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both Saturn and its retailers are
committed to making sure you are completely satisfied
with your Saturn vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, Saturn and its retailers
offer the additional assistance of a neutral party
through our voluntary participation in a
mediation/arbitration program called BBB Auto Line.
Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information booklet, located in the front cover
pocket of your owner’s handbook, for information on
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. This program is available at no cost
to you, our customer.
We ask that you not resort to BBB Auto Line until after
Saturn and its retailers have been given the opportunity
to satisfy your vehicle concerns. However, U.S.
residents may file a claim at any time by contacting your
local Better Business Bureau at 1-800-955-5100.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not
agree with the decision given in your case, you may
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
7-3
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using
the toll-free telephone number or by writing them at
the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. Saturn Corporation reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. You can find your specific vehicle information
all in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist owners who have hearing difficulties, Saturn
has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices
for the Deaf) equipment in its Saturn Customer
Assistance Center.
Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer who has
access to a TDD or to a conventional Text Telephone
(TTY) can communicate with Saturn by dialing
1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in Canada may dial
1-800-263-3830.
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your vehicle
(hand controls, wheelchair/
scooter lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The offer is available for
a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, see your Saturn retailer or call the Saturn
Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000. Text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
In Canada, customers may call the Saturn Customer
Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in
Canada may call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
Security While You Travel
For vehicles purchased in the U.S. call 1-800-553-6000
(TTY: 1-800-833-6000).
For vehicles purchased in Canada call 1-800-268-6800.
As the proud owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside
Assistance Program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Saturn’s Roadside
Assistance toll-free number is staffed by courteous and
capable Roadside Assistance Representatives who
are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel ($5
maximum) for the customer to get to the nearest
service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles.
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest Saturn
retailer for warranty service or in the event of
a vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance when the
vehicle is mired in sand, mud or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. (The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.)
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Saturn Retailer Locator Service
7-6
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Saturn’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember we are only a phone call
away. Saturn Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000;
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representatives:
Saturn reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Saturn’s
judgment, the claims become excessive in frequency
or type of occurrence.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
•
•
•
•
Telephone number of your location
Location of the vehicle
Model, year, color, and license plate number
Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number and delivery
date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Saturn reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Saturn
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components to
optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for air bag
deployment and, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock
braking and to help the driver control the vehicle
in difficult driving situations. Some information may be
stored during regular operations to facilitate repair
of detected malfunctions; other information is stored only
in a crash or near crash event by computer systems
commonly called event data recorders (EDR).
In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, such
as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated, such
as engine speed, brake applications, throttle position,
vehicle speed, safety belt usage, air bag readiness, air
bag performance data, and the severity of a collision.
This information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the SDM is required.
GM will not access information about a crash event or
share it with others other than
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
7-8
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or SDM.
®
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar , please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and data
collection.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
Saturn Corporation.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your retailer or
Saturn Corporation.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-9
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
U.S. customers can call the Saturn Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-553-6000, or write:
Saturn Corporation
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263–1999. Or,
write to:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
A variety of publications are available to you. Saturn
service manuals are written for trained technicians, and
in some cases, specialized tools and equipment are
necessary to complete certain repairs. However,
the manuals are available to owners who either have
the training, or wish to gain a greater understanding of
the technical aspect of their Saturn.
For additional publications information or to order
publications, call toll free 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
win.wallace.com/saturn to order on-line.
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available by
calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.
7-10
Owner Publications
Information on how to obtain product bulletins and as
described below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. states
and the District of Columbia, and only for cars and
light trucks with a GVWR less than 10,000 pounds
(4 536 kg). Copies of individual bulletins are also at your
participating Saturn retailer. You can ask to see them.
In Canada, information relating to product service
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your Saturn
retailer.
Service Bulletins
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors product
performance in the field. We then prepare bulletins for
servicing our products better. You can get these
bulletins, too.
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the
proper use and care of your vehicle. Some describe
costly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairs
which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid
future costly repairs.
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new or
unexpected condition. Others describe a quicker
way to fix your vehicle. They can help a technician
service your vehicle better.
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small
number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a qualified
technician may have to determine if a specific
bulletin applies to your vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins,
call Saturn Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
win.wallace.com/saturn to order on-line.
7-11
✍ NOTES
7-12
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-16
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature ................ 3-69
Adding Windshield Washer Fluid ....................... 5-35
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-7
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-91
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade) ............................ 3-44, 3-47, 3-52
Air Bag
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-28
Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-62
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-72
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-68
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-71
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-68
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...... 1-69
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-67
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-64
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-20
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-8
AM ............................................................... 3-71
AM-FM Radio ................................................. 3-42
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-73
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............................ 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-31
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-82
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-85
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-88
Appearance Care (cont.)
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............
Finish Damage ............................................
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Ashtrays ........................................................
Assist Handles ...............................................
Audio Output ..................................................
Audio System(s) .............................................
AM-FM Radio .............................................
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ..................
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................
Fixed Mast Antenna .....................................
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
Radio with CD ............................................
Setting the Time ..........................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
Automatic Climate Control System .....................
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation .......... 2-35,
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
Automatic Operation ........................................
Automatic Transaxle ........................................
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
5-82
5-85
5-88
5-87
5-88
5-89
5-85
3-17
2-41
3-61
3-41
3-42
3-72
3-73
3-73
3-73
3-50
3-45
3-41
3-69
3-71
3-20
2-37
3-14
3-21
2-21
5-23
2-23
1
B
C
Backing Up .................................................... 4-44
Battery .......................................................... 5-39
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-7
Battery Run-Down Protection ............................ 3-16
Battery Warning Light ...................................... 3-29
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-23
Before You Drive ............................................ 3-59
Brake
Parking ...................................................... 2-27
System Warning Light .................................. 3-30
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-36
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-38
Brakes .......................................................... 5-36
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-19
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-46
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) .......................... 5-49, 5-50
Fog Lamps ................................................. 5-49
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-46
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-47
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-52
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ................................ 5-50, 5-52
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-64
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-7
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-98
Carbon Monoxide ................... 4-26, 4-40, 2-13, 2-31
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-85
Your Cassette Tape Player ............................ 3-72
Your CD and DVD Player ............................. 3-73
Your CDs and DVDs .................................... 3-73
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-43
Cassette Tape Messages ................................. 3-54
Cassette Tape Player Service ............................. 6-9
CD Adapter Kits ............................................. 3-54
CD Messages ........................................ 3-49, 3-58
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-41
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .... 5-49, 5-50
Center Rear Passenger Position (Wagon) ........... 1-31
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-68
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-34
Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-25
Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-16
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-88
2
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ..........................
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
Seat Position ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Seat Position ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ..................................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ...........................................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Inside of Your Vehicle ..................................
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .....
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .......................
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet ....................................
1-42
1-38
1-50
1-35
1-52
1-56
1-54
1-52
1-58
1-46
1-47
1-44
3-17
5-82
5-85
5-88
5-85
5-87
5-86
5-82
Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-84
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-84
Cleaning the DVD Player ................................. 3-68
Cleaning the Mirror ................................. 2-36, 2-38
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-84
Cleaning the Video Screen ............................... 3-68
Cleaning Tires ................................................ 5-87
Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-84
Cleaning Windshield, Backglass and Wiper
Blades ....................................................... 5-86
Climate Control System ................................... 3-17
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-24
Automatic ................................................... 3-20
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-24
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-81
Compass Calibration ............................... 2-35, 2-37
Compass Operation ......................................... 2-37
Compass Variance .................................. 2-35, 2-37
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-33
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-32
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-22
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-33
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-26
Cooling System .............................................. 5-29
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
3
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-5
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ................ 7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government .............................................. 7-9
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-10
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-13
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ............. 3-39
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Defogging and Defrosting ......................... 3-19, 3-23
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-10
Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-33
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature ................. 3-71
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-34
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-15
Door
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10
Locks .......................................................... 2-9
4
Door (cont.)
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-16
Seat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-3
Six-Way Power Seat ...................................... 1-4
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-15
City ........................................................... 4-20
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-24
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-17
Winter ........................................................ 4-26
Driving on Grades ........................................... 4-45
Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-27
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-19
Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-19
Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-44
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System ................... 3-59
DVD Display Error Messages ........................... 3-67
DVD Distortion ............................................... 3-68
DVD Radio .................................................... 3-62
DVD Radio Error Messages ............................. 3-68
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ......................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
Emergency Trunk Release Handle (Sedan) .........
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs ...................................................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Battery .......................................................
Change Engine Oil Light ...............................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Heater ............................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ...........................
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................
Drive Belt Routing .......................................
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
Exhaust .....................................................
Oil .............................................................
Overheating ................................................
Reduced Power Light ...................................
Starting ......................................................
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ......................
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing ..................
Engine Oil Additives ........................................
Entry Lighting .................................................
5-91
5-92
5-92
5-91
2-15
3-36
5-20
5-39
3-38
3-34
5-23
2-22
3-33
3-32
6-14
5-12
2-31
5-16
5-26
3-38
2-21
5-95
4-46
5-18
3-15
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-8
Express-Down Window .................................... 2-17
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-35
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-20
Finding a Station ............................ 3-42, 3-45, 3-50
Finish Care .................................................... 5-86
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-88
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-73
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-7
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-69
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-70
Floor Console Fuse Blocks ............................... 5-92
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-23
Power Steering ........................................... 5-34
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-35
FM ............................................................... 3-71
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-14
Folding Rear Seat ............................................ 1-8
Following Distance .......................................... 4-44
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-7
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
5
Fuel (cont.)
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-40
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-40
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-92
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-91
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-33
Fuel .......................................................... 3-40
Speedometer .............................................. 3-27
Tachometer ................................................. 3-27
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-41
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................... 7-5
6
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-4
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-7
Headlamps .............................................. 3-7, 3-13
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-46
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-46
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-47
Headphones ................................................... 3-59
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-5
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-3
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-24
Hitches .......................................................... 4-43
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-10
Horn ............................................................... 3-5
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank ................................................. 5-31
How to Check ................................................ 5-62
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-34
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ....... 5-20
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-16
Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-19
I
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-28
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-27
If the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-35
If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-35
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard ......................... 4-28
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-30
If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer ...................... 4-41
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-20
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-38
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-61
Installing the Cargo Shade ............................... 2-44
Instrument Panel
Cluster ....................................................... 3-26
Overview ..................................................... 3-2
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-15
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-15
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-40
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Lamps
Exterior ......................................................
Fog Lamps .................................................
Interior .......................................................
Lap Belt ........................................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................... 1-17, 1-26,
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
Leaving Your Vehicle .......................................
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running ..........................................
Liftgate Release (Wagon) .................................
Liftgate/Trunk .................................................
Light
Air Bag Readiness .......................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................
Battery Warning ..........................................
Brake System Warning .................................
Change Engine Oil ......................................
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator ..................
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning .............
Low Coolant Warning ...................................
Low Fuel Warning .......................................
Low Washer Fluid Warning ...........................
3-13
5-49
3-15
1-32
1-29
1-50
1-52
2-12
2-29
2-14
2-13
3-28
3-31
3-29
3-30
3-38
3-39
3-32
3-33
3-40
3-39
7
Light (cont.)
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-34
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-37
Reduced Engine Power ................................ 3-38
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-28
Security ..................................................... 3-38
Service Vehicle Soon ................................... 3-39
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-32
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-32
Trunk Ajar .................................................. 3-39
Load Floor Storage Box ................................... 2-42
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-34
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12
Locks
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10
Door ........................................................... 2-9
Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-12
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12
Power Door ................................................ 2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-14
Low Coolant Warning Light .............................. 3-33
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-40
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ....................... 3-39
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-4
8
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using Your ................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-46
Making Turns ................................................. 4-44
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-34
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-4
Manual Operation ........................................... 3-22
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-3
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-17
Map Lamps .................................................... 3-15
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-7
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass
and Temperature Display ........................... 2-36
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®,
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-34
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-33
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-33
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-39
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-39
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-39
Outside Remote Control Mirror ...................... 2-38
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-19
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-27
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-38
Engine ....................................................... 5-16
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-37
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-35
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4
OnStar® Personal Calling ................................. 2-41
OnStar® Services ............................................ 2-40
OnStar® System ............................................. 2-40
OnStar® Virtual Advisor .................................... 2-41
Operation ...................................................... 3-18
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-5
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-24
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-39
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-39
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-39
Remote Control Mirror .................................. 2-38
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
Owner Publications ......................................... 7-11
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................
Shifting Out of ............................................
Parking
Brake ........................................................
Over Things That Burn .................................
Parking on Hills ..............................................
Passenger Compartment Air Filter .....................
Passing ................................................. 4-13,
Passlock® ......................................................
Playing a Cassette Tape ..................................
Playing a CD .................................................
2-28
2-30
2-27
2-30
4-45
3-24
4-44
2-18
3-52
3-47
9
Playing the Radio ........................... 3-42, 3-45, 3-50
Playing the Single CD Player ........................... 3-54
Playing the Six–Disc CD Player ........................ 3-56
Power ............................................................. 1-4
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-16
Door Locks ................................................. 2-10
Electrical System ......................................... 5-92
Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-38
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-34
Windows .................................................... 2-17
Power Steering ............................................... 4-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-11
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-15
R
Radios ..........................................................
AM-FM Radio .............................................
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ..................
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................
Radio with Cassette and CD .........................
Radio with CD ............................................
Setting the Time ..........................................
Theft-Deterrent ............................................
Understanding Reception ..............................
10
3-41
3-42
3-72
3-73
3-73
3-50
3-45
3-41
3-69
3-71
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-11
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-33
Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................... 3-59
Rear Seat Outside Passenger
Positions (Wagon) ....................................... 1-28
Rear Seat Passenger Positions (Sedan) ............. 1-25
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-25
Rear Window Defogger ............................ 3-20, 3-23
Rear Window Wiper/Washer (Wagon) .................. 3-9
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-36
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with OnStar®,
Compass and Temperature Display .................. 2-34
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-33
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-33
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-5
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-32
Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-38
Remote Control .............................................. 3-64
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5
Removing the Cargo Cover .............................. 2-44
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-74
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools (Sedan) ....... 5-71
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools (Wagon) ...... 5-72
Removing the Wheel ....................................... 5-74
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-52
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-39
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-10
Saturn ....................................................... 7-10
United States Government .............................. 7-9
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-72
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 1-73
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-72
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-73
Resynchronization ............................................. 2-8
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-25
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-31
Roof Rack System .......................................... 2-42
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-14
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-32
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................
Safety Belts
Care of ......................................................
Driver Position ............................................
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .....
3-28
5-85
1-16
1-16
1-15
Safety Belts (cont.)
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ...................................... 1-33
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-25
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-25
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-35
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-24
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-11
Safety Chains ................................................. 4-43
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-3
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-5
Manual ........................................................ 1-3
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5
Six-Way Power Driver .................................... 1-4
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................. 1-8
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-56
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-52
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-54
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-52
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-58
Security Light ................................................. 3-38
Security While You Travel .................................. 7-6
Sedan ..................................................... 1-8, 1-48
Sensor .......................................................... 3-23
11
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-34
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-10
Vehicle Soon Light ....................................... 3-39
Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-11
Service Engine Soon Light ............................... 3-34
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-10
Setting Preset Stations .................... 3-43, 3-46, 3-51
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-41
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .......... 3-44, 3-47, 3-52
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-87
Shift Lock Release .......................................... 2-26
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-28
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-30
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-19
Skidding ........................................................ 4-14
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-20
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-83
Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-98
Speedometer .................................................. 3-27
Split Folding Rear Seat ..................................... 1-8
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-21
Steering ........................................................ 4-10
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-11
Steering Tips .................................................. 4-10
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-5
Stereo RCA Jacks .......................................... 3-60
12
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................
Glove Box ..................................................
Load Floor Storage Box ...............................
Roof Rack System .......................................
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...............
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ......................
Sun Visors .....................................................
Sunroof .........................................................
2-41
2-41
2-42
2-42
5-79
4-30
2-18
2-45
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-27
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ................................ 5-50, 5-52
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-32
Temperature and Compass Display .................... 2-34
Temperature Display ........................................ 2-37
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-69
Theft-Deterrent System ...................................... 2-6
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-18
Passlock® ................................................... 2-18
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-5
Tire Inflation Check ........................................... 6-9
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-54
Tire Size ....................................................... 5-58
Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-59
Tires ............................................................. 5-54
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-64
Chains ....................................................... 5-68
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-70
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-81
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-69
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-61
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-62
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-65
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-67
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-67
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-64
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-22
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-46
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-47
Torque Lock ................................................... 2-29
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-42
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-32
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-40
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-32
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-32
Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-43
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-23
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-23
Trap-Resistant Trunk Kit ................................... 2-15
Trunk Ajar Light .............................................. 3-39
Trunk (Sedan) ................................................ 2-13
Trunk/Liftgate ................................................. 2-13
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-6
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-45
U
Understanding Radio Reception ........................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss ................................................
Used Replacement Wheels ..............................
Using Cleaner on Fabric ..................................
Using the Recovery Hook ................................
3-71
5-65
3-70
5-68
5-83
4-31
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-34
Service Soon Light ...................................... 3-39
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................... 7-8
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-90
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-91
13
Vehicle Storage ..............................................
Ventilation Adjustment ......................................
Video Screen .................................................
Visor Vanity Mirrors .........................................
Visors ...........................................................
5-40
3-24
3-62
2-18
2-18
W
Wagon .................................................. 1-10, 1-48
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-25
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-4
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-5
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ...................... 3-39
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-85
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-41
Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-42
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-17
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-20
What to Use .................................. 5-24, 5-34, 5-35
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-67
Replacement ............................................... 5-67
14
When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-16
When to Change Engine Oil (GM Oil
Life System) ............................................... 5-19
When to Check .............................................. 5-62
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-34
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ..... 5-20
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking
on a Hill ..................................................... 4-46
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-44
Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 1-12
Window Lock Out ........................................... 2-18
Windows ....................................................... 2-16
Manual ...................................................... 2-17
Power ........................................................ 2-17
Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-9
Fluid .......................................................... 5-35
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-53
Fuses ........................................................ 5-91
Windshield Wiper Lever ..................................... 3-8
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-26
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement